Today’s News 28th September 2016

  • "The Only Way Out Is Creative Destruction" Sinn Fears "Self-Inflicted Malaise"

    Authored by Hans-Werner Sinn, originally posted at Project Syndicate,

    Almost exactly eight years ago, the Lehman Brothers collapse plunged the global economy into recession. The interbank market collapsed, and the entire industrialized world was thrown into the worst crisis since the end of World War II. Though central banks have maintained ultra-low interest rates, the crisis hasn’t yet been fully overcome. On the contrary, numerous economies, such as the southern European countries and France, simply aren’t making any headway. And Japan has been on the ropes for a quarter-century.

    Some economists believe that this is evidence of “secular stagnation,” a phenomenon described in 1938 by the American economist Alvin Hansen, who drew on Karl Marx’s Law of the Tendency of the Rate of Profit to Fall. Owing to the gradual exhaustion of profitable investment projects, according to this view, the natural real interest rate has continued to fall. Stabilizing the economy thus is possible only by an equivalent decline in policy interest rates.

    In view of the huge credit bubble that preceded the crisis in Japan, the United States, and southern Europe, and the aggressive policies pursued by central banks over the last few years, I doubt that this theory is correct. In fact, I find it plausible that a very different mechanism lies behind the post-2008 stagnation, which I refer to as “self-inflicted malaise.”

    This hypothesis is best understood in the context of the economist Joseph Schumpeter’s theory of the business cycle. Faulty expectations on the part of market participants regularly cause credit and asset-price bubbles. Investors, expecting prices and incomes to rise, purchase residential and commercial properties, and they take chances on new business ventures. Real-estate prices start to rise, a construction boom occurs, and a new phase of rapid expansion begins, partly sustained by the revitalization of the domestic economy, including services. The growth in incomes increasingly emboldens borrowers, which further heats things up.

    Then the bubble bursts. Investment collapses and real-estate prices fall; businesses and banks go bankrupt; factories and residential buildings are vacated; and employees are laid off. Once prices and wages have fallen, new investors step in with new business ideas and establish new firms. After this “creative destruction,” a new phase of rapid expansion sets in.

    In the current crisis, however, monetary policy preempted the creative destruction that could have formed the basis for a new upswing in growth. Asset holders talked central bankers into believing that Schumpeter’s economic cycle could be overcome by large-scale bond purchases financed via the printing press, and by corresponding interest-rate reductions.

    To be sure, these measures stopped the fall in asset prices halfway and thus saved much wealth. But they also prevented sufficient numbers of young entrepreneurs and investors from risking a new start. Instead, established firms remained in place, keeping themselves afloat but lacking the wherewithal for new investments. In Japan and Europe, in particular, large numbers of such zombie firms and banks survived, and they are now blocking would-be competitors able to drive the next upswing in growth. The resulting economic ossification looks like the secular stagnation that Hansen described; in fact, the malaise is self-inflicted.

    And, because low interest rates have reduced asset managers’ returns, some central banks – and the European Central Bank, in particular – have relied on successive interest-rate cuts in an effort to engineer ersatz value gains for assets. The economy is thus caught in a trap, forcing the ECB to engage in ever more radical monetary-policy measures. Its current program of quantitative easing is meant to double the money supply in a very short period. Further guns are being moved into position, such as successively more negative nominal interest rates or so-called helicopter money.

    The only way out of the trap is a hefty dose of creative destruction, which in Europe would have to be accompanied by debt relief and exits from the eurozone, with subsequent currency devaluations. The shock would be painful for the incumbent wealth owners, but, after a rapid decline in the dollar values of asset prices, including land and real estate, new businesses and investment projects would soon have room to grow, and new jobs would be created. The natural return on investment would again be high, meaning that the economy could expand once again at normal interest rates. The sooner this purge is allowed to take place, the milder it will be, and the sooner Europeans and others will be able to breathe easy again.

  • Deutsche CEO Goes Full 'Dick Fuld': Bailout "Out Of The Question" Sees "Few Risks… Comfortable Liquidity"

    Will John Cryan's name go down in the annals of financial history lore alongside Erin Callan, Joe Gregory, and Dick Fuld?

    Given the extreme level of denial and hubris the Deutsche Bank CEO reportedly uses in an interview with Germany's Bild magazine, we'd say chances are better than even.

    Echoing Fuld's blustering 2008 description of a Lehman balance sheet with "billions in highly liquid assets," along with his plan to sell prized assets, and threats to "hurt the shorts";

     

    Deutsche's Cryan stated unequivocally that the bank is "comfortably equipped with free liquidity," that he sees no need for a capital raise – as he plans to sell Postbank – and a state bailout "is not an issue for us,"  could not understand "how someone can say that."

    As a reminder, here are some special moments from Fuld and Callan's mouths as Lehman fell…

    March 2008: Lehman had eliminated close to 4,000 jobs in the last year.

     

    April 2008: "The worst of the financial crisis impact is behind us" … "environment will remain challenging for a while"

     

    " by adhering to strong risk-management standards and running the company well, "I will hurt the shorts, and that is my goal."

     

    Lehman has more than $35 billion of cash and liquid assets and another $65 billion of "unencumbered" assets that aren't pledged elsewhere and can easily be turned into cash, Fuld and Chief Financial Erin Callan said Tuesday.

    And here, as Bild reports, is Deutsche Bank's CEO John Cryan explaining that everything is fine, nothing to see here… (via Google Translate)

    The CEO of Deutsche Bank sees no need for state support of his institution. In an interview with "Bild" (Wednesday) John Cryan said aloud advance notification to the question whether the Bank need government aid: "This is not an issue for us."

     

    The manager had also jected reports and speculation about alleged talks with German Chancellor Angela Merkel (CDU) on state aid for the German bank. "I have not asked the Chancellor at any time for help. I have indicated like nothing." Cryan said. He could not understand "how someone can say that."

     

    Even its shareholders do not want to ask for help of the German Bank CEO. "The question of a capital increase currently does not arise," said the manager. The Bank met all regulatory capital requirements. They have "far fewer risks in the books than in the past" and was "comfortably equipped with free liquidity".

     

    The CEO described the situation of Deutsche Bank as better than it was currently perceived from the outside.

    So no capital increase, plenty of liquidity, and fewer risks?

    Investor jitters were stoked by a preliminary Justice Department request that the bank pay $14 billion to resolve a probe into its handling of mortgage-backed securities. The company has said it expects to whittle down the settlement amount, just as other Wall Street banks did during their talks.

    “It was clear from the beginning that we would not pay this sum,” Bild quoted Cryan as saying.

     

    “The Department of Justice will treat us with the same fairness as American banks that have already agreed on a compromise."

    The bank is also selling assets (just like Lehman)…

    The CEO stressed that he considers the planned sale of Postbank started: ".. Everything is ready, we could pass Postbank tomorrow into new hands – but then the price has to be right, we have time."

    When asked whether there would be a bonus waiver for directors like 2016 again next year, Cryan said:

    "We're in a difficult transition, everyone knows that no one harbors unrealistic expectations.."

    So there you have it. Nothing to see here at all. All you hedgers and speculators are crazy…

     

    So who blinks first? The ECB – knowing the collateral chains that will snap. The Bundesbank – knowing their entire banking system is at risk. The German government – knowing it's over for them if DB depositors have to take a haircut… Or Brussells – who know the entire EU plan is teetering is done if anything but the 'rules' are applied to Deutsche. For now, there is one thing for sure – the market will press for one of these players to be forced to make decision.

  • General Market Commentary 9-27-2016 (Video)

    By EconMatters


    We talk about various markets from Bonds and Gold to Natural Gas and Oil in this video. Something seems to be going on underneath the radar in crude oil, maybe we are starting to experience some tighter markets right here. API had draws across the board tonight in the Oil Market.

    © EconMatters All Rights Reserved | Facebook | Twitter | YouTube | Email Digest | Kindle   

  • A Few Uncomfortable Truths You Won't Hear From The 2016 Presidential Candidates

    Submitted by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “If liberty means anything at all, it means the right to tell people what they do not want to hear.”—George Orwell

    In the interest of liberty and truth, here are a few uncomfortable truths about life in the American police state that we will not be hearing from either of the two leading presidential candidates.

    1. The government is not our friend. Nor does it work for “we the people.”
    2. Our so-called government representatives do not actually represent us, the citizenry. We are now ruled by an oligarchic elite of governmental and corporate interests whose main interest is in perpetuating power and control.
    3. Republicans and Democrats are not sworn enemies so much as they are partners in crime, united in a common goal, which is to maintain the status quo.
    4. Presidential elections are not exercises in self-government. They are merely business forums for selecting the next CEO of the United States of America, Inc.
    5. No matter which candidate wins this election, the police state will continue to grow. In other words, it will win and “we the people” will lose.
    6. The lesser of two evils is still evil.
    7. There is virtually no difference between psychopaths and politicians.
    8. Americans only think they’re choosing the next president. In truth, however, they’re engaging in the illusion of participation culminating in the reassurance ritual of voting.
    9. The U.S. government has become a greater menace to the life, liberty and property of its citizens than any of the so-called dangers from which the government claims to protect us.
    10. The government knows exactly which buttons to push in order to manipulate the populace and gain the public’s cooperation and compliance.
    11. Fear, which now permeates the populace, leads to fascism.
    12. If voting made any difference, they wouldn’t let us do it.
    13. America’s shadow government—which is comprised of unelected government bureaucrats who operate beyond the reach of the Constitution—is the real reason why “we the people” have no control over our government.
    14. The government does whatever it wants.
    15. You no longer have to be poor, black or guilty to be treated like a criminal in America. All that is required is that you belong to the suspect class—that is, the citizenry—of the American police state.
    16. Whether instigated by the government or the citizenry, violence will only lead to more violence. Anyone who believes that they can wage—and win—an armed revolt against the American police state is playing right into the government’s hands.
    17. “We the people” are no longer shielded by the rule of law.
    18. Government eyes are watching you. Every move you make is being monitored, mined for data, crunched, and tabulated in order to form a picture of who you are, what makes you tick, and how best to control you when and if it becomes necessary to bring you in line.
    19. Private property means nothing if the government can take your home, car or money under the flimsiest of pretexts, whether it be asset forfeiture schemes, eminent domain or overdue property taxes. Likewise, private property means little at a time when SWAT teams and other government agents can invade your home, break down your doors, kill your dog, wound or kill you, damage your furnishings and terrorize your family
    20. If there is an absolute maxim by which the federal government seems to operate, it is that the American taxpayer always gets ripped off.
    21. From the moment they are born to the time they legally come of age, young people are now wards of the state.
    22. Americans are powerless in the face of militarized police.
    23. Government bureaucrats believe they have the right to search, seize, strip, scan, spy on, probe, pat down, taser, and arrest any individual at any time and for the slightest provocation.
    24. Forced cavity searches, forced colonoscopies, forced blood draws, forced breath-alcohol tests, forced DNA extractions, forced eye scans, and forced inclusion in biometric databases are just a few ways in which Americans continue to be reminded that we have no control over what happens to our bodies during an encounter with government officials.
    25. Finally, we all bleed red. And we all suffer when violence becomes the government’s calling card. Remember, in a police state, you’re either the one with your hand on the trigger or you’re staring down the barrel of a loaded gun. The oppression and injustice—be it in the form of shootings, surveillance, fines, asset forfeiture, prison terms, roadside searches, and so on—will come to all of us eventually unless we do something to stop it now.

    These are not problems that can be glibly dismissed with a few well-chosen words, as most politicians are inclined to do. Nor will the 2016 elections do much to alter our present course towards a police state.

    Indeed, the popularity contest for the new occupant of the White House will not significantly alter the day-to-day life of the average American greatly at all. Those life-changing decisions are made elsewhere, by nameless, unelected government officials who have turned bureaucracy into a full-time and profitable business.

    As I point out in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, these problems will continue to plague our nation unless and until Americans wake up to the fact that we’re the only ones who can change things for the better and then do something about it. Indeed, the Constitution opens with those three vital words, “We the people.”

    What the founders wanted us to understand is that we are the government.

    There is no government without us—our sheer numbers, our muscle, our economy, our physical presence in this land. There can also be no police state—no tyranny—no routine violations of our rights without our complicity and collusion—without our turning a blind eye, shrugging our shoulders, allowing ourselves to be distracted and our civic awareness diluted.

    No matter which candidate wins this election, the citizenry and those who represent us need to be held accountable to this powerful truth.

  • Caught On Tape: Hackers Take Control Of A Moving Tesla From Miles Away

    Tesla can’t seem to catch a break this year with multiple accidents blamed on the company’s autopilot feature, earnings misses and huge cash burns on lower than expected deliveries that have resulted in the company hitting its bank “funding limit”, and a controversial proposed merger with SolarCity.  Fortunately, none of this has really mattered to shareholders who keep supporting the stock near its all time highs. 

    As such, we suspect that Chinese hackers posting the first-ever evidence on youtube that they can hack into moving Teslas and control the vehicles from miles away won’t be of much concern to shareholders either. 

    Nevertheless, we present the following startling footage of Tesla Model S vehicles being remotely controlled by hackers who demonstrate the ability to manipulate everything from overriding the internal displays to opening locked doors and slamming on the brakes while the car is moving.  Seems pretty safe, right?

    The following footage shows a hacker slamming on the brakes of this Model S from 12 miles away.

    teslagif1.gif

     

    Per Forbes, the hack by Tencent’s Keen Security Labs Team was the first demonstration of anyone proving they could remotely control vehicles, making the potential for real-world attacks a little more realistic.

    Keen said it had informed Tesla’s security team of multiple vulnerabilities in the latest models running the most recent software. Moreover, the hacks were found to work on various versions of the Tesla Model S and are believed to also work across all marques.

    A Tesla spokesperson acknowledged the Keen hack and said it had issued an over-the-air update to “address” the vulnerabilities even though the “risk to our customers was very low.”

    “Within just 10 days of receiving this report, Tesla has already deployed an over-the-air software update (v7.1, 2.36.31) that addresses the potential security issues.  The issue demonstrated is only triggered when the web browser is used, and also required the car to be physically near to and connected to a malicious wifi hotspot. Our realistic estimate is that the risk to our customers was very low, but this did not stop us from responding quickly.”

    We agree, it’s probably nothing to worry about.

    The full video can be viewed here:

  • Viral Surveillance Video Reveals A Shocking Scene From China's Housing Bubble

    Chinese home prices in August rose the most in more than six years, indicating local government efforts to avert a housing bubble have failed. Average new-home prices in the 70 cities rose 1.2% in August from July, the biggest increase since January 2010, while the value of home sales jumped 33% last month from a year earlier. At the same time, prices in Tier 1 cities, soared 3.5%, the most on record.

    Still, in ongoing efforts to limit speculation in China’s latest housing bubble, cities such as Hangzhou have phased in ownership rules like banning those born outside the city from owning more than one property. Alas, squeezing demand represents a misguided way to tame a bubble, because if anything it leads to bursts of buying, sending prices soaring, followed by just as sharp plunges as the greater fools panic and rush to offload, forcing the initial rule to be undone, resetting the cycle… something which last happened in China in 2013 and is taking place again now.

    Nowhere was this seen better than on a surveillance camera recording which captured China’s sheer housing bubble lunacy in its shocking raw intensity.

    As People’s Daily reports, a surveillance camera – and the resulting viral video – caught the moment new real estate in east Hangzhou opened for sale on September 24. The resulting spree was prompted by the abovementioned new restrictions launched on Monday, which prevents people born outside Hangzhou from buying more than one property.  What is mind-boggling is that despite one of the buying lunatics caught in the stampede literally tearing down the entrance door, all the properties sold out in a matter of hours.

  • Bridgewater Calculates How Much Time Central Banks Have Left

    One of the key themes that have emerged in the past year is that, having loaded up their balance sheets with tens of trillions in various assets, central banks are “running out of road.” While it is a topic extensively discussed on these pages, going all the way back to 2014, a good summary of the practical limitations on central banks comes from the following series of charts from Deutsche Bank.

    The first slide looks at the bond transmission mechanism, namely that central banks have become increasingly aware of the adverse impact of low bond yields on financial sector profitability; another aspect is that European pension liabilities as a % of market cap are at a 10-year high – and above the levels they reached in 2008, when the European market cap was at half the current level. This means that absent an independent rise in inflation expectations, central banks’ attempts to push up nominal bond yields (via less QE or faster hikes) risks leading to higher real bond yields as well; the implication is that equities tend to de-rate when real bond yields rise (i.e. the discount rate increases).

    There is a limitation from the standpoint of markets as well: European 12-month forward P/E, at 14.9x, is around 20% above its 10-year average; DB notes that its P/E model suggests that this deviation is fully accounted for by the fact that real bond yields are 180bps below their 10-year average; more troubling is the admission that any removal of monetary accommodation would likely lead to a sharp rise in credit spreads to reflect the deterioration in fundamentals (with default rates now at 5.7%), while equity strategist note that accommodative monetary policy has driven aggregate bond and equity valuations to the highest level since 1800

    In the third slide, DB points out that while equities would likely react positively to any rise in nominal bond yields driven by higher inflation expectations (rather than by higher real bond yields), underlying inflation is only likely to accelerate if growth accelerates to be clearly above potential (i.e. the output gap closes). Meanwhile, weakening growth momentum in the US points to downside risks for inflation, and that since the Chinese RMB is still around 10% overvalued – and any renewed devaluation is likely to weigh on DM inflation expectations.

    * * *

    Ok fine, central banks are “running out of road”, however at the same time they are terrified to rip (or even peel) the band-aid off. This has put the system in an unstable equilibrium: on one hand, central bankers – as even they admit – need to hand over the growth impulse over to governments, yet on the other hand, they terrified of even the smallest change to the status quo as they know they may undo some 7 years of “wealth effect” creation overnight.

    How much longer can this charade continue?

    While many would be quick to answer “indefinitely” that is not true, because with every bond, ETF or stock, purchased by central bankers they come to the point where they either monetize the entire lot, or they increasingly impair the functioning of the capital markets (just ask the dozens of marquee hedge funds that have shuttered in recent years).

    Luckily, in a recent analysis, Ray Dalio’s Bridgewater asked precisely this question, and even better, provided the answer to how much time is left until both the ECB and BOJ hit the limits on their existing programs.

    As the chart below shows, assuming no changes to existing programs, the ECB and the BOJ, the two central banks most actively monetizing debt currently, have 8 and 26 months respectively, if they do no changes to their programs.

    However, if incremental easing is layered on, like expanding the scope of their bond buying programs or purchasing equities even more aggressively, the total rises substantially. The final answer: 68 months, or just above 5 and a half years,  in the case of the ECB, were it to steamroll all political opposition and monetize virtually every possible bond (and 20% of the equity market), and 48 months, or 4 years, in the case of the BOJ.

    Which means for those market participants who have already torn most of their hair out from participating in a centrally planned “market” where nothing makes sense, get ready because, the insanity may last another 4 or 5 years longer…

  • "The Donald Nailed It" Stockman Screams "We Are In A Big Fat Ugly Bubble"

    Submitted by David Stockman via Contra Corner blog,

    Most of the 90 minutes last night was a wastewith both candidates lobbing well-worn clichés, slogans and sound bites at the audience and each other.

    But there was one brief moment that made it all worthwhile. That was when Donald Trump peeled the bark off the Fed’s phony recovery narrative and warned that the stupendous stock market bubble it has created will come crashing down the minute it stops pegging rates to the zero bound.

    “……Typical politician. All talk, no action. Sounds good, doesn’t work. Never going to happen. Our country is suffering because people like Secretary Clinton have made such bad decisions in terms of our jobs and in terms of what’s going on.

     

    Now, look, we have the worst revival of an economy since the Great Depression. And believe me: We’re in a bubble right now. And the only thing that looks good is the stock market, but if you raise interest rates even a little bit, that’s going to come crashing down.

     

    We are in a big, fat, ugly bubble. And we better be awfully careful. And we have a Fed that’s doing political things. This Janet Yellen of the Fed. The Fed is doing political — by keeping the interest rates at this level. And believe me: The day Obama goes off, and he leaves, and goes out to the golf course for the rest of his life to play golf, when they raise interest rates, you’re going to see some very bad things happen, because the Fed is not doing their job. The Fed is being more political than Secretary Clinton.

    Trump thereby landed a direct hit on the false Wall Street/Washington postulate that the Fed has been the nation’s economic savior. And he also elicited an almost instant defense of its destructive, anti-capitalist regime of Bubble Finance—-albeit in the guise of a “fact check” by the New York Times’ Fed reporter, Benyamin Appelbaum.

    To be sure, there were actually no “facts” to check in Trump’ statement. It was simply an entirely correct judgment that the utterly unnatural interest rates engineered by the Fed have fueled an egregious inflation of financial asset prices and that “some very bad things” are going to happen when the Fed’s market rigging operation is finally halted.

    Still, and opinion or not, Appelbaum emitted a barrage of harrumphing and scolding, implying that Trump is some kind of yokel who does not understand the sacred independence of the Fed:

    In attacking the Fed, Mr. Trump is plowing across a line that presidential candidates and presidents have observed for the past several decades. There has been a bipartisan consensus that central banks operate most effectively when they are shielded from short-term political pressures. Indeed, President Richard M. Nixon’s insistence that the Fed should not raise rates in the early 1970s played a role in unleashing a long era of inflation — and in convincing his successors that it was better to leave the Fed to its technocratic devices.

    Technocratic devices? Now that is downright balderdash because what the Fed is doing is profoundly and resoundingly political.

    To wit, after 94 months on the zero bound the Fed has executed the most massive income and wealth transfer in American history. Upwards of $2.5 trillion has been extracted from the hides of main street savers and retirees over that eight year period (@ $300 billion per year). All of that and then some was gifted to the banks and Wall Street speculators.

    Needless to say, a wealth redistribution that monumental in scope and capricious in impact would never see the light of day among the unwashed “politicians” that Appelbaum apparently thinks are too benighted to be involved in monetary policy. That’s because whether or not they embrace the Keynesian nostrum that saving is bad and debt is good, the nation’s politicians are smart enough to know that the sweeping fiscal transfer at the core of Fed policy would be shouted down by the voters in a thunderous chorus of denunciation and derision.

    Stated differently, the politician at least know that if the Congress were to enact anything remotely similar to the Fed’s savage and relentless attack on savers and wage-earners, they would be on the receiving end of the torches and pitchforks that would descend on the Imperial City.

    In fact, this wanton redistribution from savers to debtors and speculators is occurring only because a happenstance of history has put lethal financial power in the hands of an insulated, unelected monetary politburo; and one that has been taken-over by a tiny posse of delusional and power-hungry Keynesian academics, to boot.

    Journalistic hacks like Appelbaum, along with Steve Liesman of CNBC and Jon Hilsenrath of the Wall Street Journal, not only exhibit the worst kind of access-driven mendacity; they also faithfully perpetuate all the myths, shibboleths and outright lies that insulate the Fed from any policy accountability whatsoever.

    In the case at hand, Appelbaum claims that it was Nixon’s manhandling of the spineless Fed Chairman, Arthur Burns, in the run-up to the 1972 election that proved the case for the strict “independence” of the Fed. The  resultant decade-long inflationary wave instigated by the nefarious Tricky Dick, therefore, was the inadvertent founding event; it allegedly fostered a newly minted separation of powers doctrine that has invested the 12 members of the FOMC with virtually dictatorial powers over the nation’s financial system.

    Well, yes, Nixon was the evil-doer that paved the way to our present form of mutant casino capitalism. But it was not because Arthur Burns had a propensity to bend over in the presence of great power.

    To the contrary, the real evil happened in August 1971 when Nixon was persuaded by a passel of so-called free market economists, led and inspired by Milton Friedman, to trash the Bretton Woods system, and sever the dollar’s last link to anything other than the whims and economic theories of the FOMC.

    It did take several decades, of course, for the denizens of the Eccles Building to realize that with the shackles of gold and convertibility removed, they were free to generate dollar liabilities at will. Indeed, the great Paul Volcker fully understood what had happened at Camp David, and strove mightily during the next decade, first at the NY Fed and then in the Eccles Building, to keep the fiat genie bottled-up via sheer intellectual discipline and willpower.

    But it couldn’t last, and not just because Alan Greenspan checked in his hard money doctrines in the cloak room of the Eccles Building the first day he arrived and never reclaimed the check. What happened was that the financial press discovered that it could swap journalistic integrity for access, and the rest is now history.

    What has materialized, in fact, is a cult of central bank flattery and subservience that is every bit in the emperor has no clothes modality. Not since the days of Bill Greider has a mainstream journalist even dared to suggest that Fed policies have untoward effects on the people or that its real function is to serve the interests of its Wall Street masters.

    But now it’s gotten downright hideous. There is not an honest price left in any precinct of the financial system. Dangerous, unstable speculative bubbles infest every corner of the money and capital markets.

    Likewise, the Fed’s fatuous policy of inflation targeting has caused the massive off-shoring of breadwinner jobs to the China Price for goods and the India Price for services. And that wasn’t the half of it.

    At the same time, this sweeping and perverse job destruction policy has generated massive slack in the domestic labor markets—upwards of 180 billion hours in quantitative terms. That overhang, in turn, has suppressed nominal wage rates in the middle and bottom end of the labor market, causing wage-earners to fall increasingly behind a relentlessly rising cost of living.

    And then it has added insult to injury by fueling the fantastic bubble in the stock market that Trump so accurately called-out last night. Its not just that it will soon crash and wipe-put tens of trillions of paper wealth. Actually, the real evil of ZIRP and QE has already been done.

    To wit, can anyone not drinking the Wall Street Cool-Aid believe that John Stumpf and his patron, St, Warren Buffet, were actually running a bank?

    In fact, the C-suites of corporate America have been turned into stock gambling dens, and corporate balance sheets have been strip-mined to fund the greatest financial engineering ponzi schemes every conceived.

    The truth is, Janet Yellen is a paint-by-the-numbers academic fool who has no clue about the havoc she and her posse have unleashed on the American economy. Yet she gets away with it exactly owing to the “Fed independence” cover story so mendaciously peddled by the likes of Appelbaum, Liesman and Hilsenrath.

    Thank heavens for the Donald. He knows a rigged job when he sees it, and, at least last night, was undomesticated enough to let 100 million voters hear the truth.

  • WA Goes After Pre-Crime: Gun Confiscation Proposed For Those "Likely To Commit Violence In The Near Future"

    A new ballot measure being considered by voters in Washington State, officially referred to a Initiative Measure 1491, would allow authorities to seize guns from people considered “significantly more likely to commit violence toward themselves or others in the near future.”  The legislation would allow authorities with a court order to seize an individual’s guns for a period of up to 1 year.  Under the measure, gun owners would have the right to appeal a court order to have their guns returned but would have no ability to block the upfront confiscation.

    The full text of Initiative Measure 1491 is included at the end of this post but below are a couple of key excerpts:

    This act is designed to temporarily prevent individuals who are at high risk of harming themselves or others from accessing firearms by allowing family, household members, and police to obtain a court order when there is demonstrated evidence that the person poses a significant danger, including danger as a result of a dangerous mental health crisis or violent behavior.

     

    Studies show that individuals who engage in certain dangerous behaviors are significantly more likely to commit violence toward themselves or others in the near future. These behaviors, which can include other acts or threats of violence, self-harm, or the abuse of drugs or alcohol, are warning signs that the person may soon commit an act of violence.

     

    Individuals who pose a danger to themselves or others often exhibit signs that alert family, household members, or law enforcement to the threat. Many mass shooters displayed warning signs prior to their killings, but federal and state laws provided no clear legal process to suspend the shooters’ access to guns, even temporarily.

    I-1491

     

    According to the Wall Street Journal, if the measure passes, Washington would become the second state after California to allow family members and police to petition a judge to take guns from a person considered a danger. Connecticut, Indiana and Texas have similar laws, but only police can ask a judge to do so.

    Aside from all the obvious issues surrounding unreasonable seizures of personal property, another key issue with the bill is the broad definition of people who can petition authorities to confiscate someone’s guns.  Per the measure’s definition of “Family or Household Member”, any disgruntled former “dating partner” could allege mental instability and have someone’s personal property confiscated as a form of retribution.  

    Family or household member” means, with respect to a respondent, any: (a) Person related by blood, marriage, or adoption to the respondent; (b) Dating partners of the respondent; (c) Person who has a child in common with the respondent, regardless of whether such person has been married to the respondent or has lived together with the respondent at any time; (d) Person who resides or has resided with the respondent within the past year; (e) Domestic partner of the respondent; (f) Person who has a biological or legal parent-child relationship with the respondent, including stepparents and stepchildren and grandparents and grandchildren; and (g) Person who is acting or has acted as the respondent’s legal guardian.

    While the WSJ has alleged that the bill has bipartisan support, the state’s Republican Party and gun-right’s groups are slightly less “enthusiastic” with the Washington State Rifle and Pistol Association saying “it’s just an excuse to go after guns.”

    The state Republican Party has yet to take a position on the initiative, and Ms. Hutchison said she doesn’t know if it is a solution.

     

    “That’s something that sounds very good on the surface,” said Joe Waldron, legislative chairman for the Washington State Rifle and Pistol Association. “It’s just an excuse to go after guns.”

     

    Mr. Waldron said he is concerned that the measure would deprive gun owners of their constitutional rights, including due process and protections against unreasonable search and seizure.

    What are the chances this bill has any impact at all on violent crime in the state of Washington?

     

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 27th September 2016

  • George Soros' False Flag Factories

    Submitted by Wayne Madsen via Strategic-Culture.org,

    Global hedge fund tycoon and political provocateur George Soros is leading a war of symbols, namely flags and banners either resurrected or conjured up by his myriad non-profit groups, to stir religious, racial, and ethnic tensions the world over. From the Serbian OTPOR! movement and its clenched-fist symbol adopted by protests groups around the world to the menacing black and white flag of the Islamic State, which first appeared during the Soros-backed «Arab Spring» rebellions, Soros’s «false flag» factories have been running at break-neck production speeds.

    Soros and his acolytes saw the importance of symbology in the writings of Gene Sharp of the Albert Einstein Institution in Boston, Massachusetts. Although Sharp’s catechism of how to conduct non-violent resistance and revolution has been likened by some political scientists to Mohandas Gandhi and Dr. Martin Luther King, his concepts on upsetting the political status quo appear to be borrowed more from the likes of Mao Zedong, Karl Marx, and Adolf Hitler.

    Among Sharp’s necessary tools to conduct political action are «flags and symbolic colors», «slogans, caricatures, and symbols», and «banners, posters, and displayed communications». The «symbolic colors» have been used by Soros- and Central Intelligence Agency-sponsored «color revolutions» in Ukraine (Orange) and Kyrgyzstan (Pink) and attempted color revolutions in Iran (Green), Kuwait (Blue), and Burma (Saffron).

    Using the Sharp template and financing from Soros and the CIA-linked National Endowment for Democracy (NED), Symbols were used in the themed Arab Spring revolutions in Tunisia (Jasmine) and Egypt (Lotus) and attempted revolutions in Georgia (Rose), Lebanon (Cedar), Uzbekistan (Cotton), and Moldova (Grape).

    It is now more than obvious that Soros and his minions, known as «Sorosites» – a clever play on «parasites» – in the Balkans, contracted with flag factories to churn out banners of former regimes in the uprisings in Libya and Syria. In Libya, the rebels who rose up against Libyan leader Muammar Qaddafi in 2011 brandished factory-fresh, still-creased red-black-green horizontal tricolor with the white crescent and star used by the old Libyan monarchy, the regime that Qaddafi overthrew in 1969.

    Almost simultaneously, Syrian rebels opposed to President Bashar al-Assad hit the streets of major Syrian cities with factory-fresh green-white-black horizontal tricolors with three red stars used by Syria during the French League of Nations mandate and by the Republic of Syria in 1961. It was obvious that in both cases, the Soros- and NED-sponsored opposition groups in Libya and Syria foresaw a return to a pro-Western Libya as had existed under the feudalistic King Idris until his overthrow in 1969 and a Syria not unlike the pro-Western regime of Major-General Abd al-Karim Zahr as-Din, a Druze who ousted the pro-Gamal Abdel Nasser regime in Damascus in 1961. However, for Soros and the regime change advocates under U.S. Secretary of State Hillary Clinton, there would be disappointment.

    Instead of pro-Western regimes taking power in Libya and Syria, major swaths of territory fell to jihadist forces who mainly owed allegiance to the Islamic State but with a few swearing loyalty to Al Qaeda. Regardless of what jihadist entity they supported, these rebel groups received support from Saudi Arabia, the Turkish Islamist government of Recep Tayyip Erdogan, and the Gulf emirates of Qatar, Abu Dhabi, Dubai, Sharjah, and Kuwait.

    Instead of the flags of the former pro-Western proxy regimes appearing over buildings in Libya and Syria, factory-fresh black and white flags of the Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL) flew from flagpoles, windows, and balconies from Benghazi and Sirte to Tripoli and Derna. In Syria, new ISIL flags were raised from Raqqa and Majib to Idlib and Palmyra. To the east, in Iraq, ISIL flags replaced those of the U.S.-installed Iraqi government and the Kurdistan Regional Government.

    One indication as to the source of the new ISIL flags was reported on October 7, 2014 by the Jewish Telegraph Agency from the northern Israeli town of Nazareth Illit. Gardeners in the factory area of the city discovered a bag that had fallen onto a street from a truck. Twenty-five new black and white ISIL flags were found inside the bag.

    A number of questions were raised by the discovery. Were the flags manufactured by a factory in the Jewish city? It is known that the Israeli military provided logistical and other support to jihadists fighting across the Golan Heights border in Syria. Were ISIL flags part of Israeli propaganda support to the jihadist rebels? Additionally, did Soros and the NED outsource the production of ISIL, as well as the flags of former Arab regimes, to the Israelis for distribution in Libya and Syria?

    Soros’s connections to ISIL became very apparent during the opening session of the United Nations General Assembly when some human rights advocates, including some linked to Soros’s nongovernmental organizations, called for the International Criminal Court (ICC) to prosecute the leadership of ISIL. The ICC, which is heavily influenced by Soros organizations, balked at the idea of prosecuting ISIL officials and operatives.

    The ICC claimed that since neither Syria nor Iraq were parties to the 1998 Rome Statute, which created the court, ISIL commanders and ground troops could not be hauled before the international tribunal to answer for their crimes against humanity in those countries. The ICC has had no problem prosecuting leaders and military officers from the Balkans and Africa, but ISIL was deemed off-limits.

    The ICC was also prepared to put members of the Qaddafi family on trial for alleged crimes in Libya, however, ISIL and its affiliates in Libya were of no interest to the court. The main reason for the ICC to look askance at ISIL is because in any trial of the group’s leadership, the «false flag» antics of the Saudis, Israelis, Turks, Emiratis, the Soros organizations, and the Americans might have been laid bare for all the world to see.

    Soros’s false flag antics are not merely confined to the Middle East. The eruption of violence among African-Americans in response to police violence targeting mainly African-American men saw new flags bearing the slogan «Black Lives Matter» being raised in cities and towns across the United States. It is well-known that Soros finances the Black Lives Matter group and the flags appeared to be yet another use of banners, slogans, and symbols in keeping with the template of Sharp and his themed revolution model.

    While «Black Lives Matter» flags appeared throughout America, historical flags like the 13-star «Betsy Ross» flag from the American Revolution; the Gadsden Flag bearing the motto «Don’t Tread on Me», a slogan popularized by Benjamin Franklin; and any flag bearing any symbols from the Confederate States of America were denounced by Soros-funded pressure groups as «racist». There were demands that these historical American flags be banned from cemeteries, parks, historical battlefield sites, and other locations. This was yet another «false flag» attack by Soros and those who actually wish to alter American history and impose a regime of extreme political correctness in violation of the free speech clause of the U.S. Constitution.

    As a result of Sharp’s roadmap to revolution, flags and symbols are potent weapons. Police in Spain have found ISIL flags in towns located in southern Spain, the location of the old Al Andalus Caliphate that the Islamic State has vowed to «liberate» from Christianity. Turkish flags are found in greater numbers in some German neighborhoods than German flags. Hispanic groups protesting Republican presidential candidate Donald Trump wave factory-fresh Mexican flags. The telltale signs of George Soros and CIA destabilization efforts can be found in the flags that appear in crowds of protesters. Vexillology intelligence (Vexint), or flag intelligence, should become a branch of every major intelligence agency around the world.

  • I Prefer Donald Trump over Hillary Clinton (Video)

    By EconMatters


    Donald Trump might just be outside the career politician mode enough to address some of the structural issues facing this country over the next four years that sadly Hillary Clinton will just continue perpetuating with the status quo. I expect out of control spending and continued fiscal mismanagement during Hillary Clinton`s Presidency.

     

    © EconMatters All Rights Reserved | Facebook | Twitter | YouTube | Email Digest | Kindle    

  • Debate Post-Mortem: Rematch Required As Commentators Split On Debate Winner, Markets Give Hillary Nod

    From "big, fat, ugly bubbles" to "trumped-up trickle-down" economics, tonight's debate had something for everyone. One-liners and soundbites were dropped like confetti with strange facial gestures, delicate coughs, and direct jabs flying left, right, and center. As far as the results go, it's anyone's guess: Lester Holt was soundly beaten by everyone online; the markets (S&P Futs and the Mexican Peso) both suggested a Trump loss, Trump won Twitter, online (and unscientific) polls were undecided with a slight nod to a Trump victory, as commentators were mixed, most siding with their ideological bias.

    As Bloomberg reports, after a little more than 90 minutes of debate (full transcript here), here are the key takeaways from tonight's event:

    The candidates spent a good deal of time on stop-and-frisk, racial issues, Obama birther matter, ISIS and nuclear weapons.

     

    Trump appeared to be rambling on a number of questions, especially on foreign policy.

     

    Clinton made points on the tax returns, with Trump not ending questions about whether he failed to pay any federal income taxes — an not offering a clear reason as to why he's not releasing his tax returns.

     

    Clinton's answers often were recitations of her campaign statements.

     

    It was difficult for Holt, as moderator, to keep the candidates focused on the questions. At times, it appeared he'd lost control of the debate.

    Behind their glazed eyes…

     

    Some Key Excerpts

    Clash of the Titans…

     

    Then Hillary struck…

     

    Quickly followed by Trump…

    And…

     

    Trump on 'birtherism'

    "I got him to give the birth certificate," he said about President Barack Obama.

    Trump on his temperament

    "I think my strongest asset by far is my temperament. I have a winning temperament," Trump said.

    Trump on taxes

    "That makes me smart," Trump said in response to Clinton saying he might not pay federal income taxes.

    Clinton on her emails

    "I made a mistake using private email," Clinton said.
    "That's for sure," Trump added.

    How rich?

    "Maybe he's not as rich as he says he is … There is something he's hiding … Who does he owe money to?" Clinton speculating on why Trump hasn't released his tax returns.

    Trump Won The Drinking Game:

     

    Trump Won Twitter:

     

    Polls Were Mixed:

    Drudge – as expected – big trump win, suggesting whoever was for Trump before, remained with Trump:

     

     

    NJ.com – Trump win.

     

    Time.com – Hillary win.

    Fortune.com – Small Trump win.

     

    The Hill: Trump slightly ahead:

     

    On the other hand, judging by the market's response, Trump lost:

     

    Judging by the surge in futures and the Mexican peso, markets judged the first of three U.S. presidential debates a win for Hillary Clinton: U.S. stock index futures reversed losses, while Mexico’s peso rebounding from a record low and haven assets including the yen and gold fell.  S&P 500 futs gained 0.4 percent as shares in Asia pared losses. Mexico’s peso rose as much as 1.5 percent, although rolled over toward the end of the debate.

    *  *  *

    She Said…

    • *CLINTON SAYS KEY ELECTION QUESTION IS WHAT FUTURE FOR U.S.
    • *CLINTON SAYS NEED TO BUILD AN ECONOMY FOR `EVERYONE'
    • *CLINTON SAYS NEED TO INVEST IN INFRASTRUCTURE, RENEWABLES
    • *CLINTON CALLS FOR RAISING MINIMUM WAGE, MORE PROFIT SHARING
    • *CLINTON SAYS WEALTHY NEED TO `PAY THEIR FAIR SHARE'
    • *CLINTON: TRUMP'S TAX PLAN IS TRUMPED UP TRICKLE-DOWN ECONOMICS
    • *CLINTON SAYS TRUMP `ROOTED FOR THE HOUSING CRISIS'
    • *CLINTON, TRUMP SPAR ON ECONOMIC RECORD OF BILL CLINTON'S YEARS
    • *CLINTON: `DONALD, I KNOW YOU LIVE IN YOUR OWN REALITY'
    • *TRUMP: YOU HAVE NO PLAN; CLINTON: I WROTE A BOOK ABOUT IT
    • *CLINTON: I HAVE A FEELING I'LL BE BLAMED FOR EVERYTHING
    • *CLINTON ON PRIVATE EMAILS: I MADE A MISTAKE; TRUMP AGREES
    • *CLINTON SAYS SHE'S MET PEOPLE `STIFFED' BY TRUMP'S BUSINESSES
    • *CLINTON: RACE REMAINS `SIGNIFICANT' CHALLENGE IN U.S.
    • *CLINTON: TRUMP PAINTS `DIRE, NEGATIVE' PICTURE OF BLACK AMERICA
    • *CLINTON SAYS WANTS TO END PRIVATE PRISONS IN STATE SYSTEMS TOO
    • *CLINTON SAYS TRUMP INVITING RUSSIA TO HACK WAS `UNACCEPTABLE'
    • *CLINTON SAYS TRUMP BACKED IRAQ WAR AND LIBYA INTERVENTION
    • *CLINTON SAYS TRUMP HAS `CAVALIER ATTITUDE' ON NUCLEAR WEAPONS
    • *CLINTON SAYS U.S. CAMPAIGN HAS CAUSED WORRY FOR WORLD LEADERS

    He Said…

    • *TRUMP SAYS U.S. JOBS `FLEEING THE COUNTRY' INCL. TO MEXICO
    • *TRUMP: THEY'RE USING OUR COUNTRY AS PIGGY BANK TO REBUILD CHINA
    • *TRUMP: WE HAVE TO STOP OUR JOBS FROM BEING STOLEN FROM US
    • *TRUMP CITES FORD, CARRIER SAYING NEED TO KEEP COS. IN U.S.
    • *TRUMP CALLS CLINTON BY SECRETARY TITLE, ASKS IF THAT'S OK
    • *TRUMP INTERJECTS ON CLINTON ATTACK: `THAT'S CALLED BUSINESS'
    • *TRUMP SAYS U.S. ENERGY POLICIES ARE A `DISASTER'
    • *CLINTON, TRUMP SPAR ON ECONOMIC RECORD OF BILL CLINTON'S YEARS
    • *TRUMP SAYS NAFTA IS THE WORST TRADE DEAL SIGNED ANYWHERE
    • *TRUMP SAYS CLINTON FLIPPED ON TPP AFTER HIS CRITICISMS
    • *TRUMP: YOU HAVE NO PLAN; CLINTON: I WROTE A BOOK ABOUT IT
    • *TRUMP SAYS WE HAVE NO LEADERSHIP, THAT STARTS WITH CLINTON
    • *TRUMP SAYS CLINTON A `TYPICAL POLITICIAN,' THAT SHE'S ALL TALK
    • *TRUMP SAYS THE FED IS NOT DOING THEIR JOBS, BEING POLITICAL
    • *TRUMP ON E-MAILS: THAT WAS NOT A MISTAKE, DONE PURPOSEFULLY
    • *TRUMP ON RACIAL DIVIDE, SAYS NEED TO HAVE `LAW AND ORDER'
    • *TRUMP: TEND TO AGREE W/ BLOCKING GUNS FOR THOSE ON NO-FLY-LIST
    • *TRUMP: BLACK COMMUNITY HAS BEEN `LET DOWN' BY POLITICIANS
    • *TRUMP SAYS HE GOT OBAMA TO PROVIDE HIS BIRTH CERTIFICATE
    • *TRUMP SAYS CLINTON ALLIES PEDDLED OBAMA BIRTHPLACE QUESTIONS
    • *TRUMP SAYS DOESN'T KNOW IF RUSSIA HACKED DNC, COULD BE OTHERS
    • *TRUMP: ISLAMIC STATE COULDN'T HAVE FORMED IF WE'D TAKEN THE OIL
    • *TRUMP SAYS IDEA HE SUPPORTED IRAQ WAR IS MEDIA NONSENSE
    • *TRUMP SAYS HE HAS MUCH BETTER TEMPERAMENT THAN CLINTON DOES
    • *TRUMP: NUCLEAR WEAPONS ARE NUMBER ONE THREAT NOT CLIMATE CHANGE
    • *TRUMP ON NUCLEAR WEAPONS: I WOULD CERTAINLY NOT DO FIRST STRIKE
    • *TRUMP: CLINTON DOESN'T HAVE THE LOOK, DOESN'T HAVE THE STAMINA
    • *TRUMP: `HILLARY HAS EXPERIENCE, BUT IT'S BAD EXPERIENCE'

    *  *  *

    The bottom line.

     

    So, as Obama would say after his first unfortunate debate in 2012, on to the rematch.

  • "Foot-In-Mouth" Trump Vs. "Frog-In-Throat" Clinton: First Presidential Debate Begins – Live Feed

    The day has finally arrived. The two most disliked presidential candidates in the history of America face off mano a (wo)mano in a 90-minute, pee-break-barred grudge match of the politically-correct corrupt establishmentarian against the deplorable status-quo-wrecker. With the polls tied up, there's everything to play for as a record audience tunes in to see who will screw up first

    Anything could happen…

     

    With race almost perfectly tied up in the polls, as we detailed earlier, there is everything to play for, and as The Hill details, here are five things to watch for in the heavyweight clash that will set the course for the final 42 days of the election…

    Will Trump bring up _______?

    During the GOP primary debates, Trump veered from controversial and blustering to subdued and cordial. On the campaign trail, he’s shifted away from free-wheeling stream-of-consciousness rallies to reading from prepared text, but sometimes the teleprompter is not enough to keep him on message. The Clinton camp is preparing for everything but is undoubtedly unnerved by the prospect of Trump conjuring one of the countless real and imagined conspiracies or controversies from Clinton’s decades in public life. Trump could make Clinton’s marriage an issue by bringing up Monica Lewinsky, Paula Jones, Juanita Broaddrick or Kathleen Willey, or he could bring up Clinton’s health, just weeks after a passerby captured dramatic cellphone video of her appearing to pass out while leaving a 9/11 memorial in New York City. He could also veer into conspiracy. Trump during the GOP primary suggested rival Ted Cruz’s father might have been involved in the assassination of President John F. Kennedy. The GOP nominee has huddled with controversial anti-Clinton author Ed Klein, whose work has been dismissed by the mainstream political class as unsubstantiated conspiracy-mongering. And he has surrounded himself with conservative media giants like former Fox News chief Roger Ailes and Breitbart chairman Steve Bannon, both known for gleefully trafficking in the most embarrassing aspects of Clinton’s private life. It all has the potential to blow Clinton off course. Or it could backfire spectacularly on Trump and provide an election-defining moment of authenticity for Clinton. The Democrat will also have ample opportunities to get under Trump’s skin. A New York Times report said Clinton wants to show him unhinged, which could signal she intends to dig at her rival over his business accomplishments, temperament, past controversies with women or ties to right-wing extremist elements.

     

    Body language

    Every move, subconscious twitch and unplanned reaction will be captured in high definition, magnified before a Super Bowl-sized audience and endlessly dissected on cable news. Minor physical faux pas have sunk candidates in the past, from Al Gore sighing in 2000 to George H.W. Bush checking his watch in 1992. Trump has a flashy and over-the-top style punctuated by unique hand gesticulations and facial expressions. He is entertaining to watch and is a ratings juggernaut but is also in the position of having to prove to a skeptical public that he is commander in chief material — not just a showman. Clinton, meanwhile, is a cool and accomplished debater but can come across as dull or dispassionate. The Democratic nominee badly needs to energize a liberal base that has shown indifference to her. She’ll be looking to avoid a performance that appears overly scripted or sterile under the bright lights.

     

    The moderator

    Lester Holt, the modest and understated anchor of "NBC Nightly News," need only ask his colleague Matt Lauer, the host of NBC’s "Today," how tricky moderating a presidential forum can be. Lauer has suffered immense blowback from critics who said he was unprepared and allowed Trump to walk all over him at a military forum earlier this month. Holt will face intense scrutiny for the questions he asks, how he frames those questions, and whether he fact-checks and challenges the candidates on their claims. In 2012, CNN anchor Candy Crowley came under fire for correcting Mitt Romney — wrongly, according to conservatives — at a key moment in a debate against President Obama over a question about Benghazi. There are myriad controversies and scandals involving both candidates that Holt could choose to raise. Partisans will be keeping tally. The campaigns and candidates are already busy working the ref. Trump this week said Holt is a Democrat and warned the anchor not to fact-check his assertions. The Clinton campaign is publicly fretting that Holt has such low expectations for Trump that the moderator will take it easy on the GOP nominee while holding Clinton to a higher standard.

     

    What voters do Trump and Clinton speak to?

    Both candidates have work to do in shoring up their respective bases, but both also need to expand their appeal. Clinton has big leads over Trump among Hispanics, African-Americans and young voters. But none of these groups that formed the core of the Obama coalition are particularly enthused about turning out for her. She could lay it on thick with a message that energizes that liberal core, which could help her slam the door shut on Trump. But Clinton could also be looking to expand her appeal to Republicans who can’t bring themselves to vote for Trump. That would mean casting herself as a centrist and a pragmatist, rather than a fierce advocate for the causes important to the left. Trump, meanwhile, badly needs to resonate with some constituency outside his core base of white men. His efforts to reach African-American voters have been mocked as condescending and trafficking in stereotypes. Many minority voters and young people aren’t considering voting for Trump, but if he can improve even slightly on his dismal numbers there it could be meaningful for him in the long-run. A focus on minority outreach might also help alleviate the fears of white, college-educated voters who are steering clear of Trump because they don’t want to be associated with a candidate who has been accused of racism and bigotry.

     

    The debate over black and blue

    A police shooting of a black man under disputed circumstances in North Carolina has the nation on edge. The fatal shooting of Keith Lamont Scott has sparked protests in Charlotte and once again put the spotlight on police practices in black communities. Potentially furthering the tension — Monday’s debate is expected to attract upwards of 10,000 protesters and will take place on Long Island, which has a high concentration of cops, firefighters and first responders. Trump has broken recently from his hard-line pro-police stance, saying he was “troubled” by a different police shooting of a black man in Tulsa, Okla., which has led to charges of manslaughter against the officer. Tensions are running hot on both ends of the debate, and how the candidates handle the super-charged political minefield will be revealing.

    With some big money bets going down in the last few days on Trump's victory

    We suspect tonight's battle royale will do much to solidify the nation's choice.

    *  *  *

    Live Feed:

    *  *  *

    Perhaps more crucially for many watching tonight's debate, is the opportunity to drink (responsibly at first)

    Beginner's Drinking Game…

    h/t @chgirl

    Professional's Drinking Game… (only attempt if you have attempted at least one debate drinking game)

    Simplified… Pick A Candidate, Listen for words; If any candidate says a Community word, everyone drinks…

    h/t DebateDrinking.com

    And Keeping Score…

    And for the non-drinkers… How about some Bingo:

  • "America Is On Our Side": Al-Nusra Commander Tells German Press US Is Arming Jihadists

    In a striking interview with German journalist Jürgen Todenhöfer published today the German press including the prominent newspaper Focus, a militant jihadist commander said that US weapons are being delivered to Jabhat Al-Nusra by governments that Washington supports, adding that American instructors were in Syria to teach how to use the new equipment.

    “Yes, the US supports the opposition [in Syria], but not directly. They support the countries that support us. But we are not yet satisfied with this support,” Jabhat al-Nusra unit commander Abu Al Ezz said in an interview with Koelner Stadt-Anzeiger newspaper from the city of Aleppo. According to the commander, the militants should be receiving more “sophisticated weapons” from their backers to succeed against the Syrian government.

     

    For those pressed for time, below is a summary of what the Al-Nusra commander said:

    • They are directly supported by the US
    • They received tanks and other heavy weaponry via Libya and Turkey
    • They got officers and experts from the US, Israel, Turkey inside Aleppo
    • The commanders of IS are led by Western intelligence
    • They are against cease-fires and aid deliveries
    • “The U.S. is on our side”

    In the full interview, the commander notes that “The fight is difficult. The regime is strong and gets support from Russia,” the jihadist explained. Al Ezz said that Jabhat Al-Nusra “won battles thanks to TOW rockets. Due to these rockets, we reached a balance with the regime. Our tanks came from Libya via Turkey, joined by the [BM-21] multiple rocket launchers,” he said. 

    “We will fight until the regime is toppled,” he said, referring to Assad’s government. Al-Nusra Front wants “to establish an Islamic state that will be ruled according to the Sharia law. We do not recognize any secular state.”

    The government forces have an advantage because of aircraft and missile launchers, but “we have the American-made TOW missiles, and the situation in some areas is under control,” Al Ezz added.

    But the most stunning admission came when asked if the TOW missiles were initially intended for Jabhat Al-Nusra or if the group obtained them from the moderate Free Syrian Army, the jihadist clarified: “No, the missiles were given to us directly.”

     He also said that when Jabhat Al-Nusra was “besieged, we had officers from Turkey, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Israel and America here… Experts in the use of satellites, rockets, reconnaissance and thermal security cameras.”

    Another dramatic admission: when Todenhöfer asked specifically if the US instructors were really present among the jihadists’ ranks and Al Ezz replied: “The Americans are on our side.”

    He also said that Jabhat Al-Nusra has been paid for achieving specific military goals during the Syrian conflict. “We got 500 million Syrian pounds (around $2.3 million) from Saudi Arabia. To capture the Infantry School in Al Muslimiya years ago we received 1.5 million Kuwaiti dinars (around $500,000) and Saudi Arabia’s $5 million,” Al Ezz said.

    The money came from the “governments” of those states, not private individuals, he said.

    One of the governments cited as a source of funds – Israel. “Israel is now giving us support because Israel is at war with Syria and with Hezbollah,” Al Ezz said. The West also “paved the way” for jihadists coming to Syria, saying that “we have many fighters from Germany, France, Britain, America, from all the Western countries,” the commander said.

    In the interview, Al Ezz confirmed claims made by Moscow and the Syrian government that the militants had used the Syrian ceasefire, agreed by Russia and US on September 9, to prepare for a new offensive.

    “We do not recognize the ceasefire. We will regroup our groups. We will carry out the next overwhelming attack against the regime in a few days. We have regrouped our forces in all provinces, including Homs, Aleppo, Idlib and Hama,” Al Ezz said.

    He said that Jabhat Al-Nusa would not let trucks with humanitarian aid enter Aleppo “as long as the regime [forces] are along the Castello Road, in Al Malah and in the northern regions.” “The regime must withdraw from all the territories, and we will let the trucks in. If a truck is going in anyway, we will detain the driver,” he said.

    The idea of a transitional government in Syria is also not supported by Jabhat Al-Nusra, the commander said. “We accept no one from the Assad regime or of the Free Syrian Army, which is described as moderate. Our goal is to overthrow the regime, and establish an Islamic state in accordance with the Islamic Sharia,” he said.

    As for the people who represent the Syrian opposition at the Geneva talks, Al Ezz said that “these people are weak, they’ve got a lot of money. They’ve sold themselves.”

    “There are mercenaries in Syria, Alloush fights with Al Nusra-Front,” he said talking about Mohammed Alloush, a leader in the Jaysh al-Islam group, part of the Syrian opposition’s High Negotiations Committee (HNC) in the peace talks. “The group that was housed in Turkey and which was turned into the Free Syrian Army, used to be part of Al Nusra-Front.”

    Interestingly, the al-Nusra Front commander also mentioned the UN aid convoy. Keep in mind that Todenhöfer, the first Western journalist to be granted access to the caliphate, conducted the interview ten day ago, before the attack. The commander said that the militants would not allow UN trucks carrying aid to enter Aleppo if the Syrian Arab Army does not withdraw “as required.” “The regime must withdraw from all areas in order for us to let the trucks in. If a truck drives in anyway, we will arrest the driver,” he detailed.

    Finally, in case there is still any confusion, the commander openly confirmed that Jabhat Al-Nusra “are part of Al Qaeda.”

    “Actually, we were inside one group together with the Islamic State. But the Islamic State has been used in accordance with the interests and political purposes of the big powers like America, and the group has drifted away from our principles. Most of the IS leaders are working with intelligence services, and it’s now clear for us. We, the Jabhat Al-Nusra, have our own way,” Al Ezz said.

    The interview with Jabhat al-Nusra’s commander was taken at a stone quarry in Aleppo on September 17 by Koelner Stadt-Anzeiger journalist Jurgen Todenhöfer on his seventh trip to war-torn Syria.

  • P2P Meltdown Continues: LoanDepot's CDO Collapses Just 10 Months After Issuance

    We first noted Wall Street’s misguided plan to feed its securitization machine with peer-to-peer (P2P) loans back in May 2015 (see “What Bubble? Wall Street To Turn P2P Loans Into CDOs“).  Obviously we warned then that the voracious demand for P2P loans was a direct product of central bank policies that had sent investors searching far and wide for yield leaving them so desperate they were willing to gamble on the payment streams generated by loans made on peer-to-peer platforms.

    In addition to the pure lunacy of using unsecured, low/no-doc, micro-loans as collateral for a CDO, we pointed out that the very nature of P2P loans meant that borrower creditworthiness likely deteriorated as soon as loans were issued.  The credit deterioration stemmed from the fact that many borrowers were simply using P2P loan proceeds to repay higher-interest credit card debt.  That said, after paying off that credit card, many people simply proceeded to max it out again leaving them with twice the original amount of debt.

    And, sure enough, it only took about a year before the first signs started to emerge that the P2P lending bubble was bursting.  The first such sign came in May 2016 when Lending Club’s stock collapsed 25% in a single day after reporting that their write-off rates were trending at 7%-8% or roughly double the forecasted rate (we wrote about it here “P2P Bubble Bursts? LendingClub Stock Plummets 25% After CEO Resigns On Internal Loan Review“). 

    Now, signs are starting to emerge that Lending Club isn’t the only P2P lender with deteriorating credit metrics.  As Bloomberg points out, less than year after wall street launched the P2P CDO, one of the first such securities backed by loans from LoanDepot has already experienced such high default and delinquency rates that cash flow triggers have been tripped cutting off cash flow to the lowest-rating tranches. 

    The $140mm private security, called MPLT 2014-LD1, was issued by Jefferies in November 2015 and, less than 1 year after it’s issuance, cumulative losses rose to 4.97% in September, breaching the 4.9% “trigger” for the structure.  And sure enough, the deal was sold to a group of investors that included life insurance company, Catholic Order of Foresters.

    But, as Bloomberg noted, the LoanDepot deal wasn’t the only one to breach covenants in less than a year.  Two other Jefferies securitizations backed by loans made by the online startups CircleBack Lending and OnDeck Capital have also breached triggers.

    For some reason the following clip from the “Big Short” comes to mind…“short everything that guy has touched.”

  • Wells Fargo Or The Fed: Who's The Bigger Fraud?

    Submitted by Ron Paul via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

    The Wells Fargo bank account scandal took center stage in the news last week and in all likelihood will continue to make headlines for many weeks to come. What Wells Fargo employees did in opening bank accounts without customers' authorization was obviously wrong, but in true Washington fashion the scandal is being used to deflect attention away from larger, more enduring, and more important scandals.

    What Wells Fargo employees who opened these accounts engaged in was nothing more than fraud and theft, and they should be punished accordingly. But how much larger is the fraud perpetrated by the Federal Reserve System and why does the Fed continue to go unpunished?

    For over 100 years the Federal Reserve System has been devaluing the dollar, siphoning money from the wallets of savers into the pockets of debtors. Where is the outrage? Where are the hearings? Why isn’t Congress up in arms about the Fed’s malfeasance?

    It reminds me of the story of the pirate confronting Alexander the Great. When accused by Alexander of piracy, he replies “Because I do it with a small boat, I am called a pirate and a thief. You, with a great navy, molest the world and are called an emperor.”

    Over two thousand years later, not much has changed. Wells Fargo will face more scrutiny and perhaps more punishment. There will undoubtedly be more calls for stricter regulation, notwithstanding the fact that regulators failed to detect this fraud, just as they have failed to detect every fraud and financial crisis in history. And who will suffer? Why, the average account-holder of course.

    Any penalties assessed against Wells Fargo will be made up by increasing fees on account-holders. Clawbacks of bonuses, if they occur, will likely face resistance from the beneficiaries of those bonuses, leading to protracted and costly lawsuits. Even if the Wells Fargo CEO and top executives of Wells Fargo step down, the culture at Wells Fargo is unlikely to change anytime soon. As one of the largest banks in the world, Wells Fargo knows that it is not only too big to fail, but also too big to prosecute. At the end of the day, no matter how much public posturing there is, Wells Fargo and the regulators will remain best buddies. And those regulators who failed to catch this fraud will be rewarded with more power and larger budgets, courtesy of the US taxpayer.

    Through all of this, the Federal Reserve will continue its policy of low interest rates and easy money. Retirees who hoped to be able to live off the interest on their investments will find themselves squeezed by continued low interest rates. Those living on fixed incomes will see their monthly checks buying less and less as the prices of food staples continue to rise. The fat cats on Wall Street will continue to have access to cheap and easy money while those on Main Street will face a constantly declining quality of life.

    It is well past time for the Federal Reserve to face the same music as Wells Fargo and the bad actors on Wall Street. It is, after all, the Federal Reserve's creation of money out of thin air that enables all of this fraudulent behavior in the first place, so why should the Fed remain untouchable? Let's hope that someday Congress wakes up, hauls the Federal Reserve in for questioning, and puts as much pressure on the Fed as it does on private sector fraudsters.

  • Hofstra University Unveils "Trigger Warning" For Tonight's Debate

    It was inevitable. With much of the debate over the past year focusing on Social Justice Warriors, “safe spaces”, and – most notably – “trigger warnings,” moments ago the first such caution emerged when Hofstra University- the venue of tonight’s historic debate – posted a “trigger warning” sign to warn students about the potentially disturbing content that may be discussed during Monday night’s presidential debate.

    According to CBS New York reporter Tony Aiello, a sign inside of the student center at Hofstra reads, “Trigger warning: The event conducted just beyond this sign may contain triggering and/or sensitive material. Sexual violence, sexual assault, and abuse are some topics mentioned within this event. If you feel triggered, please know there are resources to help you.”

    As MrcTV adds, the sign provides students with contact information for student counseling services, the Title IX coordinator, student advocacy and prevention, and the national sexual assault hotline

  • The QE Premium

    Authored by Michael Lebowitz via 720Global.com,

    It has been eight years since the great financial crisis of 2008, and the Federal Reserve (Fed) is still maintaining an unprecedented level of accommodation in monetary policy. The Federal Funds rate has been pinned at or near zero since 2008. Recent discussions on raising the rate a mere quarter of a percent are met with a palpable level of angst and incredulity by economists and investors alike. Since the crisis, the Fed quadrupled their balance sheet using printed money to buy U.S. Treasury and mortgage securities. The economic results, supposedly the justification for these aggressive actions, have mostly been disappointing. That said, one can credit Fed policy actions for driving financial asset valuations to historic levels.

    Over the last eight years investors have adopted a mindset that Fed intervention is good for asset prices, despite clear evidence that it has contributed little to the fundamental rationale for owning such assets.  Fixed income yields are at or near record lows and stock indices trade at valuations that have only been eclipsed twice in history, just prior to the great depression (1929) and at the height of the technology bubble (2000). High end real-estate and various collectibles trade at unparalleled levels. The eye-popping valuations on these less liquid assets further confirm how impactful Fed policy has been on asset prices.

    We have written numerous articles highlighting rich valuations and the infectious behavior that can compel investors to make investment decisions that they would not otherwise make.  In this article we employ a cash flow model to quantify the potential ramifications on the equity market. The goal is to provide investors with a simple tool to calculate total return outcomes that could occur if investors were to lose confidence in the Fed and as a result stretched market valuation premiums built up since 2008 diminish or vanish altogether.

     

    P/E Ratio

    The 720 Global cash flow model was built to provide expected total returns associated with changes to the S&P 500 P/E ratio. For instance, if the P/E ratio were to increase to 30 or decrease to 15, what total return should an investor expect? The model uses the Shiller CAPE 10 ratio versus one-year trailing earnings as it provides earnings consistency by eliminating cyclical noise. The graph below offers a long term historical perspective on the wide range of monthly P/E ratios that have occurred since 1884.

     

    CAPE Ratio

    Data Courtesy: Shiller Data  http://www.econ.yale.edu/~shiller/data.htm

    The current P/E ratio of 26.57, denoted by the black dotted line, is approximately 60% above the average and has only been eclipsed by the exuberant periods of 1929 and 2000 and matched in 2007. Since the era of Fed activism began in the 1990’s, the ratio has tended to remain elevated relative to the historical average, despite what the recent quote from Janet Yellen would have us believe. “I would not say that asset valuations are out of line with historical norms.” – Federal Reserve Chairwoman Janet Yellen 9/21/2016

     

    P/E Shifts and Returns

    The graph below shows the output of the 720 Global cash flow model. Annualized percentage equity returns on the vertical axis (which includes price changes and dividends paid) are shown for correspondent P/E scenarios along the horizontal axis. The model assumes: 2.50% annual corporate earnings growth, 3.50% annual dividend growth and a three year term over which cash flows are modeled.

     

    Expected Annualized Returns

    Data Courtesy: 720 Global Cash Flow Model

     

    Hurdle Rate

    To use the graph to calculate the expected total return for a particular P/E ratio, locate the forecasted P/E ratio on the x-axis, follow it straight up to the total return black line, and read the corresponding figure on the y-axis. The green lines on the graph exhibit how a reversion from the current P/E ratio of 26.57 to a more historically normal P/E of 17.16, imply three consecutive years of –6.73% annualized returns.

    Under normal market conditions, investors appropriately require additional levels of return for added levels of risk. Historically, U.S. equities have exhibited approximately 2.5 times the risk (measured by standard deviation of prices) of U.S Treasury bonds. Fittingly, equites have rewarded investors with approximately 4.50% of additional annual returns over the long term. Measured using the Sharpe Ratio, the bond and stock markets have been very efficient over a long time horizon at assessing comparative risk between the two assets.

    Currently, 30-year U.S. Treasury bonds yield 2.35, thus equity investors mindful of history should have an investment hurdle rate, or a required annual rate of return of 6.85% (4.50% + 2.35%). Such an annualized return over time compensates them fairly for the additional risk of buying equities.

    The 720 Global model can be used to solve for the S&P 500 price that would allow an investor to meet their given hurdle rate or required rate of return for a given P/E ratio. The graph below charts these prices versus the associated P/E ratios for a hurdle rate of 6.85%.

     

    S&P 500 Hurdle Rates

    As shown with the green lines, an investor with the aforementioned 6.85% hurdle rate and expectations of P/E ratios decreasing only modestly from 26.57 to 20.00, should feel comfortable meeting their return requirement by purchasing the S&P 500 at any price below 1706.90.

     

    Data Courtesy: 720 Global Cash Flow Model

     

    Is the Past Prologue to the Future?

    The graphs above use conservative and relatively stable earnings and dividend assumptions. If the economy slides into a recession, not only may P/E ratios dip below the mean, but earnings and dividends growth may falter. The extent to which these measures adjust is often influenced by the extremity of valuations.

    The following table highlights historical experiences that occurred the three other times that P/E ratios resided at or above current levels. The top half of the table displays the changes in the ten year average earnings growth, dividend growth and P/E ratios that occurred during the 1929, 2000 and 2008 market corrections. The bottom half of the table uses that data as its assumptions and forecasts how similar changes would affect total returns today.

     

    Summary

    Equity valuations are grossly dislocated from supporting fundamental data. Comparisons to historic norms, despite what Janet Yellen claims, are far from reality. Investors willing to study history and look at current data will come to the same conclusion. Those that do will also likely agree that the downside looms large as mean reversion is, after all, a powerful force in the markets.

    The purpose of this article is not to claim that the market will immediately correct. In fact, there are several reasons, however unsound, that valuations may indeed rise further. The point is to stress that the odds are not in your favor of that occurring. Any sort of regression to mean, or as frequently occurs below mean, will result in a sizeable market correction as shown. To reiterate this point, the graph below shows the range of returns associated with the various P/E ratios described earlier. Additionally, the bar chart backdrop illustrates the percentage of time the market traded at the corresponding P/E ratios. Based on this analysis, one should expect negative returns if P/E ratios revert to historical ranges.

     

    Expected Annualized Returns with Historical Distribution of P/E Ratio

    Data Courtesy: 720 Global Cash Flow Model

    The current economic recovery and equity bull market rank among the longest on record. Concurrently, domestic and global economic data are slowing markedly while U.S. corporate earnings are declining. Even more concerning, the Federal Reserve’s tool kit is sparse and their ability to continue to prop up the market appears limited. To be blunt, given the aforementioned fundamental risks and the poor risk/return skew, history is clearly not in favor of those who remain long equities banking on the Fed to continue to levitate valuations and prices with limited tools and faulty narratives.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 26th September 2016

  • "You're An Idiot & A Lunatic if You Question 'Safe Spaces' Or 'Microaggression'" – President Of Northwestern

    Submitted by Mark Glennon via WirePoints.com,

    Never mind that he’s talking about many who his university educated, including me. Any of you who question campus preoccupation with safe spaces, trigger warnings and microaggressions are idiots and lunatics. That’s what Northwestern University President Morton Schapiro told new students this past week in his welcoming address. Articles about his comments include those in CampusReform and The Daily Northwestern.

    “Look for safe spaces,” Schapiro told the freshman, and he pledged that “if you can’t find them, we will help you find them.” Regarding traumatic ideas, Schapiro says, “If they say that…you shouldn’t be warned to prepare yourself psychologically for that, that somehow that’s coddling, those people are lunatics.”

    Northwestern University President Morton Schapiro

    The hypocrisy is breathtaking. Words like “idiot” and “lunatic” are just the kind from which the safe space crowd thinks it should be protected.

    Contempt for stereotyping is also high among their pieties. Yet Schapiro told his students, “The people who decry safe spaces do it from their segregated housing places, from their jobs without diversity — they do it from their country clubs. It just drives me nuts.”

    But it’s the microaggression thing that’s most interesting. Those who deny their existence are “idiots,” Schapiro says.” They “cut you to the core” and aren’t easily forgotten.

    Seems to me that’s why they’re great. I like them. They piss you off. They force you to decide who you are and what you stand for.

    Daislyland. Safe from the horrors of “microagression.”

    Like that girl from Manhattan in the dorm at Northwestern who told me she could never see any reason to go to the south suburbs (where I am from). Or the union thug when I worked at Jewel who threatened me with retaliation for questioning the political contributions I was forced to make. Or the people in the Cook County Recorder of Deeds office who would shake you down to get a lien search done when I was a young lawyer. Or some of the comments and emails I get here.

    I bet everybody who reads this – anybody with motivation, that is, in whatever direction – has their own stories. That’s what gets you out of bed in the morning.

    It’s far worse for gays, blacks and certain others. I get that. No comparison. Nobody is defending slurs or bigotry against them. But Schapiro’s obsession with microaggressions extends to everybody, and “micro” just isn’t big enough to worry about.

    “If you want to play in the NFL, you gotta play hurt,” football guys say. That’s true everywhere in everything, grownups know.

    Except at universities like Northwestern has become under Morton Schapiro.

    *  *  *

    Schapiro has defended safe spaces before: In a Washington Post op-ed published in January, he wrote that “the best hope we have of creating an inclusive community is to first create spaces where members of each group feel safe.”

    So – to translate – the 'final' solution' to creating a community where we are all equal is to segregate everyone into like-minded groups who do not feel 'safe' in the broad community?

  • "I Think It’ll Be A Clown Show" – Why Tomorrow's Debate Is So Important

    Craig Bell, a 55-year-old software engineer from Columbus, Ohio, will be one of the 100 million estimated Americans set to tune in on Monday night at 9pm for the first debate between the Democratic and Republican presidential nominees.  As profiled by Bloomberg, what he sees will be as important as what he hears. “I don’t know how to say this nicely, but I just want to see which one can act more presidential and more trustworthy,’’ Bell said at a table outside North Market in downtown Columbus.

    Bell, and millions of “undecideds” like him, is why tomorrow’s debate has such huge significance:  according to a new Wall Street Journal/NBC News poll, 34% of registered voters think the three presidential debates would be extremely or quite important in helping them decide whom to support for president. About 11% of voters are considered “debate persuadables”—that is, they think the debates are important and are either third-party voters or only loosely committed to either major-party candidate.

    Slightly more Republicans than Democrats said the debates would be important to them, 37% to 31%. But voter groups that seem poised to pay the most attention include several that Hillary Clinton is counting on to win. Some 49% of Hispanics, 42% of African-Americans and 39% of voters under age 35 say that the debates will be extremely or quite important to them.

    The breakdown of the millions of Americans yet to decide who they will vote for is shown below (apologies to Gary Johnson fans: he will not make it tomorrow): 


    According to Bloomberg, interviews conducted in key precincts of Ohio and Pennsylvania as well as other battleground states found voters who said they’ve ruled out either Clinton or Trump but aren’t yet comfortable with the alternative. Some are considering a third party contender, such as Libertarian Gary Johnson or not voting at all for president. While they care about the issues, most say they’ve heard where the candidates stand and aren’t expecting any new ground to be broken when they meet Monday night at Hofstra University in New York for the first of three scheduled debates.

    Still, they may be persuaded, and that’s what the campaigns are betting on. Indeed, as the WSJ adds, the campaigns of Donald Trump and Hillary Clinton acknowledged the huge stakes of Monday’s televised presidential debate. “In many ways, with this debate coming up, we’re just starting,” said Robby Mook, Mrs. Clinton’s campaign manager, on ABC Sunday. Added Kellyanne Conway, Mr. Trump’s campaign manager, speaking on the same network: “This will be the first time Americans have seen Donald Trump and Hillary Clinton on the same stage, and they’re going to be able to make their choice based on what they see.”

    The risk, of course, is that the two most unpopular presidential candidates in history succeed in turning away even more potential voters.

    “I feel like they are both bad choices,” said Melissa Huber, a 39-year-old day-care provider in Oklahoma. “I’m hoping that through the debate one of them will come out as a preferred option.”

    Ms. Huber is thinking of supporting Mr. Johnson, but added that like the abovementioned Craig Bell, Trump could win her over in the debate if he was to “show a little decorum. Show that he can be presidential.”

    Arnitress Dowdy, 39, an African-American who hasn’t settled on a candidate and quoted by the WSJ, is inclined to support Mrs. Clinton and is hoping to hear her address issues of race and police violence in the wake of the unrest in Charlotte, N.C.

    “I’m not sure who is really well equipped; I just need to hear more,” said Ms. Dowdy, a mother of two in New York. “I know she has advocated for children. I want to know what she will do so things will calm down.”

    * * *

    The most likely outcome from tomorrow’s debates, however, is that those who have decided on either Trump or Hillary will not change their minds, while the truly undecided will remain undecided. Worse, their confusion may be exacerbated: in that vein, Bloomberg reports that some 74 percent of likely Colorado voters deemed Trump “risky,” to 59 percent for Clinton, and 62 percent said Trump was “scary,” versus 57 percent for Clinton.

    A bigger risk, this time for Hillary, is that in a rerun of the seminal 2000 debate between Dubya and Al Gore, she passes off as even more robotic than usual: while more than eight in ten Colorado Democrats described Clinton as “competent” and “responsible,” only about 40 percent said she was “exciting,” CBS News said. When the latter group were asked specifically why they didn’t find her so, the top answer was they had wanted Senator Bernie Sanders as the party nominee, followed closely by the response that Clinton is too close to politics as usual.

    Trump did well within his own party in Colorado, being seen as “inspiring” by 72 percent of Republicans. And many Republicans who described him as risky are voting for him nonetheless, the poll showed. Some 91 percent of Republicans felt Trump would change Washington and 86 percent said he can fix the economy.

    * * *

    For those who do hope to be persuaded, here are some clues during the debate for what kind of leader the candidates will be.

    Reece Pavlovich of Columbus, 23, who works in sales for the Columbus Blue Jackets, said whether the candidates try to answer questions directly or dodge them will help him decide.

    “It’s a small tell-tale sign, if you can’t answer this one simple question that was asked of you without diverting or trying to blame it on someone else,’’ he said. “I don’t think that you’re fit to make massive world decisions or political decisions that can impact millions or billions of people.’’

    Judy Thacker of Palmetto, Florida, 58, a laid-off cook who considers herself an independent, doesn’t like either Clinton or Trump. She wants to see how they interact with each other as a cue for how they would handle themselves on the international stage. “If you watch them speak with each other, that’s how they would speak with a foreign leader if they were in a tight situation and they were trying to work something out and things were getting really hot and heavy like they will be at the debate,’’ Thacker said.

    Stephanie Frederick-Weber, 38, who lives near Reno, Nevada, doesn’t think either candidate has articulated a broader vision for the U.S. beyond standard rhetoric and hopes the debate will be an opportunity to get more than prepared speeches and talking points. “The debates are kind of integral because they kind of catch them off guard a little bit,’’ she said.

    To all of the above, and millions like them who honestly hope to be swayed, good luck.

    The rest, however, will merely be watching tomorrow’s debate just for the shock and entertainment value. As Bloomberg concludes, some undecided voters are so fed up with the race and their choices, they doubt the debate will matter or don’t plan to watch it.

    “I think it’ll be a clown show, more than I’ll get a good bombshell out of it,’’ said Ryan Porter of Columbus, 29, a financial adviser. It will be up to Trump and Hillary to prove him wrong, and – in the process – win.

  • Bush vs Obama As Explained By Glenn Greenwald In One Tweet

    Glenn Greenwald perfectly sums up the farce that is the supposed “two-party” system that rules America in one tweet…

    Welcome to the oligarchy.

    Evildoers (New Republic.com)

     

    Besties (CNN.com)

  • Dr. Lisa Bardack’s Faustian Bargain

    Submitted by Jay Michaels via AmericanThinker.com,

    “Oh what tangled webs we weave, when we first practice to deceive.”  Sir Walter Scott

    When Dr. Lisa Bardack was asked to become Hillary Clinton’s personal physician in 2001, it had to have been a crowning moment in the career of the Mt. Kisco internist.  Dr. Bardack could have anticipated little downside.  She already had the responsibility — and legal obligation under HIPAA — to protect the privacy of her patient.  She and her staff would have to be especially scrupulous in the case of a senator with presidential ambitions, but this should not have posed a serious problem.

    Unfortunately, Hillary Clinton corrupts everyone who serves her.  And this year Bardack encountered difficulties she could not have foreseen in 2001:

    1.  Clinton developed serious medical issues.

     

    2.  The candidate was being videoed, not only during campaign stops, speeches, townhalls, and the rare press conference, but before and after events — by individuals with cell phones who were under no obligation to obey orders given to servile journalists to turn off their cameras.

     

    3.  The internet not only permitted the mass distribution of these videos and photos, but it enabled those who were curious to check Bardack’s reports against information available on reputable medical sites.  It also enabled skeptical physicians to share their doubts with hundreds of thousands of readers.

    In July 2015, the Clinton campaign asked Bardack to give the candidate a clean bill of health.  She was to disclose, selectively, some of her patient’s medical history.  But the letter was not widely analyzed until after the disturbing September 11 video by Zdenek Gazda, the Zapruder of 2016.  It was no longer possible to dismiss those asking questions about Hillary’s health as right-wing conspiracy theorists, and the campaign now requested a second letter from Dr. Bardack explaining the event.  The physician duly issued a report on September 14.  Now her real problems began.

    Let’s take a look at the two letters and some of questions doctors have asked about the diagnoses and treatment.

    I.  The letter of 12 July 2015

    Bardack’s summary revealed a couple of major health problems that had not been previously disclosed.  We had been told that Clinton suffered an elbow fracture in 2009 and a concussion in 2012.  The fact that a woman in her mid-60s would fall twice ought perhaps to have raised some red flags.  In particular, unless you’re being tackled or attacked, a concussion can usually be avoided by the body’s reflexes.  Arms are extended to break the fall.

    But now the public learned that some time in 2009 and in December 2012, the month of the concussion, Clinton had suffered blood clots.

    She already had a history of clotting.  Running for the Presidential nomination in the fall of 2007, Hillary gave an extended interview on her 60th birthday in which she disclosed that she’d had a life-threatening medical emergency in 1998.  The crisis had been kept a secret not only from the public, but from her staff, who were told she had a sprained ankle.  Clinton’s foot had swollen and she was in great pain.  A White House doctor told her to rush to Bethesda Naval Hospital, where the diagnosis of a blood clot was made.  "That was scary,” Hillary said, “because you have to treat it immediately — you don't want to take the risk that it will break lose and travel to your brain, or your heart or your lungs.  That was the most significant health scare I've ever had."  Clinton assured the reporter that she was no longer on blood thinners. This was probably the last time Hillary spoke candidly about her health.

    What Clinton had was a deep vein thrombosis, or venous thromboembolism (VTE).  The blood clot is usually in the leg, and in Hillary’s case, it was behind the right knee.

    Now Dr. Bardack revealed that Hillary had had two others.  The first, in 2009, was another VTE, but the second was still more serious.  It was a right transverse cerebral venous sinus thrombosis (CVST).  This is a clot in one of the two channels between layers of the dura, the membrane enclosing the brain, which receive blood and cerebrospinal fluid.  A clot here means that blood flow out of the brain is impeded, and there is the potential for a hemorrhage if there’s leakage into the cerebral tissues.  The Johns Hopkins Health Library refers to it as a rare form of stroke affecting only five in one million individuals.  It’s treated with anti-seizure medicines as well as anticoagulants, and the complications range from impaired speech, difficulty moving parts of the body, and vision problems to death.

    There were two problems in the 2015 letter relating to the clot:

    1)  Clinton, her physician wrote, “began anticoagulation therapy to dissolve the clot.”  But this is not something anticoagulants do.  Two of these drugs are mentioned by Bardack:  Lovenox, which was discontinued beuing administered to her in 1998, and Coumadin (warfarin). 

    Bristol-Myers-Squibb, its manufacturer, says explicitly that the medication doesn’t dissolve clots: 

    COUMADIN has no direct effect on an established thrombus, nor does it reverse ischemic tissue damage.

    Every doctor prescribing Coumadin knows this.  Because of patient expectations, all reputable medical sites, like the NIH’s PubMed, repeat the warning.

    There are thrombolytic (clot-dissolving) drugs, injected by catheter or infused through an i.v., but none are mentioned by Bardack.  In any case, the embolisms for which thrombolytic agents are indicated don’t correspond to Clinton’s, and these drugs are never referred to as anticoagulants.

    2.  A second problem comes with the duration of the symptoms.  Bardack says that these lasted for less than two months.  But according to Bill Clinton, his wife’s injury “required six months of very serious work to get over.”

    Of course it could be that the four addition months of symptoms were the result not of the concussion, but the CVST.  However, it would not be easy to differentiate these symptoms.  One is instinctively disinclined to take the former President’s word on anything, but there’d be no reason for him to exaggerate the length of time it took his wife to recover.

    In any case, what the public was told was an elbow fracture (Hillary sported a State Department sling) and a concussion (she was jokingly presented with a football helmet by her minions) coincided with problems much more ominous.

    3.  A third issue in the 2015 letter is Bardack’s final evaluation of her patient.  Twice she calls Clinton “a healthy female” and concludes that “she is in excellent physical condition and fit to serve as President of the United States.”

    While Bardack could hardly have been expected to write otherwise, the truth is that anyone who is on lifelong Coumadin is not in excellent physical condition.  As is well known, warfarin was developed as a rat poison, and increases significantly the risk of intercranial intracranial bleeding.   A recent ten-year study of 32,000 veterans found that nearly one-third developed intercranial intracranial bleeds while on warfarin.  The vets were over 75, but the high figure was still very disturbing, though probably not surprising to most physicians.

    Dr. Milton Wolf, a board-certified radiologist, writes, “Coumadin carries a substantial risk for patients, particularly those with fall risk. Spontaneous hemorrhage common, intracranial and elsewhere. I see it commonly, including life-threatening brain bleeds. Normal, healthy patients are NEVER, NEVER prescribed Coumadin.”  There are safer anticoagulants.  “Coumadin is typically given to those who can’t afford the newer drugs or reserved for cases that are refractory to the safer drugs.”  Wolf speculates that Clinton probably has a hypercoagulable blood disorder.  Coumadin would otherwise be given only to patients with chronic atrial fibrillation (like the vets) or with prosthetic heart valves, both of which can cause hypercoagulation.

    The interactions with warfarin are also sobering.  In addition to avoiding both NSAIDs and acetaminophen, users are advised not to use, or to use with caution, antibiotics, anti-fungal medications, anti-depressants, and seizure medication — carbamazepine (Carbatrol, Equetro, Tegretol), phenobarbital (Solfoton), and phenytoin (Dilantin).

    Whether or not Hillary has been put at risk by seizure medications, the whole world now knows about her propensity to fall.  The airplane and podium stumbles and her being helped up a short flight of steps had gone viral long before the 9/11 collapse.  And we know nothing about the falls that have occurred off-camera, except for the one that gave her a concussion.  Family friends have told Ed Klein these falls are frequent.  And head trauma is the number one concern for patients on Coumadin.

    4.  Still another disclosure in Bardack’s July 2015 letter raised eyebrows.  In addition to taking Coumadin for the rest of her life, Hillary will also be on Armour thyroid until she dies.  Unlike CVST, hypothyroidism, an underactive thyroid gland, is common.  In fact, the most frequently prescribed drug in the U.S. (though not the most lucrative) is Synthroid, synthetic levothyroidoxine, the major hormone the gland produces.

    Armour thyroid is an extract of desiccated pig’s thyroid.  The therapy dates to the 19th century, and the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists recommends that it not be used.  But a case can be made for natural thyroid therapy, and one recent study found that more patients prefer it, though there was no difference in the control of symptoms.  These include memory problems and difficulty thinking clearly.  A physician who is one of the most vocal advocates of natural thyroid switched to a different brand of natural thyroid after Armour changed the tablet formula in 2009.

    II.  The letter of 14 September 2016

    1.  Bardack disclosed that Clinton was given a brain scan for an ear infection after she had “experienced significant improvement in her symptoms.”  The physician of a patient “in excellent health” would not normally order a CT scan for an ear infection that was being successfully treated by antibiotics and a myringotomy tube.  Bardack’s caution, however commendable, suggests she was worried about some underlying problem.

    2.  Bardack then discusses Hillary’s pneumonia.  When an upper respiratory infection persisted for a week after Clinton had been prescribed antibiotics and allergy medicine, Bardack, on Sept. 9, ordered “a non-contrast chest CT scan, including a CTA calcium score.”

    According to Dr. Wolf, a CTA (a CT angiogram) scan always requires a contrast.  On the other hand, a CT calcium score study must always be non-contrast, otherwise “the coronary calcifications would be masked by the contrast in the arteries.”  The radiologist concluded that “Hillary’s doctor just claimed Hillary got a perfect score on a test that does not exist.”

    It’s likely that Bardack misstated what she’d ordered — though one would think she would be extraordinarily careful in a letter that would be read by millions.  A coronary calcium scoring CT does not use contrast, while a CTA requires it. A simple thoracic CT, which is what Hillary must have received, may or may not be done with contrast.

    3.  Then there’s the finding from the scan:  “a small right middle-lobe pneumonia,” further described as “a mild non-contagious bacterial pneumonia.”

    Doctors immediately questioned this diagnosis.  There is no such thing as a non-contagious pneumonia, tweeted Dr. Wolf. How did Hillary pick it up?  What about all the reports  the campaign circulated about staffers who’d come down with pneumonia, including manager Robbie Mook?

    While bacterial pneumonia is not as contagious as viral pneumonia, there is no test to determine whether or not a patient is contagious.  A doctor defending Bardack listed three types of bacterial pneumonia not likely to be contagious.  The only one that Hillary could possibly have had was aspiration pneumonia.

    The dubious adjective “non-contagious” may have been dictated to Bardack by Clinton.  The problem, obviously, was that after her collapse, the candidate went directly to her daughter’s apartment, where she presumably exposed her grandchildren to pneumonia, then, 90 minutes later, bounced out of the building, exulting that it was a beautiful day in New York, and embraced a little girl, exposing her, too, to the infection.

    Other doctors have also pointed out how the photo-op undercut the “pneumonia” explanation.  “I’m feeling great,” Hillary said three times, not something a pneumonia patient is likely to exclaim.

    4.  Apart from a case of “mild non-contagious pneumonia,” what felled Clinton on September 11th, wrote Bardack, was that “she became overheated and dehydrated.”  Even MSM reporters questioned the “overheated” pretext.  The day was partly cloudy and the temperature about 80, with a slight breeze.  Dehydration is hardly less suspicious.  First of all, it’s been used repeatedly for other falls.  And medical science has come up with a cure for dehydration.  While Marco Rubio was ridiculed for taking a swig of water in the middle his reply to the President’s 2013 State of the Union address, no one who valued his job would criticize Hillary for “re-hydrating” during an event.  One would expect that someone who had experienced multiple falls and was on Coumadin would take every precaution to avoid dehydration — especially when it’s such a simple matter.

    5.  If Hillary’s dramatic recovery casts doubt on Bardack’s diagnosis, so does the fall itself.  It was not a swoon, as one might expect, where Clinton appeared woozy, lost consciousness, and her knees buckled.  Instead, she becomes stiff and immobile.  She is propped up against a bollard.  It’s only when the Secret Service agents attempt to propel her forward that she falls.  It’s not clear she’s lost conscious; she is just frozen, unable to move.

    6.  Pictures taken of Clinton en route to the van also undermine Bardack’s explanation.  In one, Hillary is being given what appears to be a finger squeeze test.

    The test is a neurological exam, sometimes used also as a test for arthritis.  There would be no reason to administer it to a patient suffering from pneumonia.

    In the second photo, the same woman, Christine Falvo, appears to be monitoring Clinton’s pulse as they walk.  Hillary has her other hand pressed against her chest, an unusual position for someone in motion, but a good way to disguise the pill-rolling tremor associated with Parkinson’s disease.

    Also present in the photos, inevitably, is the bulky African-American Secret Service agent who clearly has had some medical training.  When Hillary froze during a speech on August 4, it was he who rushed to her side, put his hand on her back, kept repeating, “Keep talking, keep talking,” and then shooed away the other agents.  Some sites have posted pictures of him holding what appears to be a diazepam injector, used for seizures, but the images are too blurry to positively identify the object.

    There is no photo of either the Secret Service medic or Falvo offering the dehydrated Hillary a bottle of water.

    7.  Bardack’s 2015 letter mentioned the Fresnel prism glasses Hillary wore to eliminate double vision.  The 2016 letter makes no mention of the Zeiss Z1 blue lenses she was wearing on September 11th.  These are used to help prevent seizures, particularly in photosensitive epilepsy, and improve motor control.  They are not normally prescribed for patients with pneumonia or seasonal allergies.

    8.  Also unmentioned by Bardack are Hillary’s repeated coughing episodes, going back at least to January of this year.  Here’s video of eight.  Has Clinton had pneumonia for nine months?  Or is this a symptom of a neurodegenerative problem causing pulmonary aspiration?

    9.  Finally, the fact that Hillary was not rushed to a hospital after the collapse and given another CT suggests that her handlers knew exactly what was going on.  And it wasn’t pneumonia.

    The physician who has put forward the most plausible case that Hillary is suffering from Parkinson’s disease is Dr. Ted Noel, whose videos I linked in a recent blog post.

    Though there’s been no sign so far of the pill-rolling tremor or the shuffling gait characteristic of Parkinson’s, other evidence suggests Clinton is suffering from the disease, or experiencing side effects associated with the drug most commonly used to manage it, levodopa, which include disorientation and confusion and dyskinesia (involuntary muscle movements).

    Examples of the latter are Clinton’s spasmodic head movements while being questioned by several reporters (attributed by Hillary to her cold chai tea) and, less dramatically, her response to the light show at the end of the Democratic convention.

    Dr. Noel has a newer video out that further undercuts Bardack’s credibility.  In addition to mentioning Wolf’s point about CT angiography, he carefully describes problems with the oxygen saturation levels reported by Hillary’s physician, and her use of an outdated test to manage Clinton’s hypothyroidism.

    If she doesn’t have Parkinson’s, Hillary clearly has some major neurological disorder. 

    Bardack has already been targeted by Google reviewers.  Purportedly coming from Chelsea is a one-star rating and the comment, “My mother died of Parkinson’s after she was diagnosed with pneumonia.”

    Lisa Bardack will be fortunate if satiric reviews are the worst consequences for the disinformation campaign she has helped wage in Hillary’s behalf.

  • Edward Snowden Warns, Whatever You Do, Don't Use Google Allo

    Google Allo, the new “smart” chat app launched on Wednesday, is ‘dangerous’ and should be avoided, according to whistleblower Edward Snowden, because it will “record every message you ever send and make it available to police upon request.”

     

     

    As RT reports, Allo, designed to unseat chat pack leader WhatsApp, promises to deliver quick conversations with features like; “Smart Reply” that can guess your answers and respond to messages with just the tap of a button, and “Google Assistant”, which answers your questions and helps you search for things directly in your chat.

    How does Allo plan on predicting your every word and witty emoji, you ask? “The more you use it, the more it improves over time,” which basically means they’ll collect and store as much of your data as possible and then use artificial intelligence to guess your replies.

    However, the efficiency of time-saving typing may end up costing customers their already compromised privacy.

    When Google first announced the introduction of Allo earlier this year they, too, had planned end-to-end-encryption in “Incognito Mode” and assured they would only store messages transiently, rather than indefinitely.

    However,  it now appears that Google won’t be doing that after all. Wednesday’s announcement revealed Google plans to store all conversations that aren’t specifically started in “incognito mode” by default.

    As Snowden pointed out, last year every single one of the NSA and FBI’s 1,457 surveillance requests was granted by the US foreign intelligence surveillance court… and Allo’s stored data (i.e. your data) will be fair game too.

    In contrast, all of WhatsApp’s chats are encrypted and unreadable – although they did announce last month that they will now be sharing your contacts and who you talk to with Facebook.

  • Trump vs Hillary: The Debate Of The Century… Gets Even Wilder

    There is nothing we can say to underscore the importance of tomorrow’s debate that can come close to Goldman’s characterization of what is about to be unleashed in just over 24 hours. As Goldman’s David Kostin puts it, the “upcoming debate ranks as the biggest match-up since the Mayweather/Pacquiao bout”…

    … adding that “the first US Presidential debate will take place on Monday, September 26 and viewership may approach Super Bowl proportions with an audience of perhaps 100 million.

    * * *

    And it may get even wilder.

    As we reported over the weekend, as Hillary Clinton and Donald Trump got ready to face off in the first – and perhaps most anticipated in US history – presidential debate, their campaigns were mired in a controversy over guests.  The candidates have been accused of using their debate invitations to get under their opponent’s skin — and appear to be trying to outdo each other with their potential guests.

    It started when billionaire Mark Cuban, formerly a supporter who then flipped and became an outspoken critic of Donald Trump, last week announced he had accepted an invitation from Clinton’s campaign to sit front-row at the debate on Monday night. In response, Trump threatened to bring Gennifer Flowers, a woman with whom former President Bill Clinton had an extramarital affair. The GOP nominee tweeted Saturday if “dopey Mark Cuban of failed Benefactor fame wants to sit in the front row, perhaps I will put Gennifer Flowers right alongside him.”

    As reported previously, Flowers was eager to accept the invitation: “Hi Donald. You know I’m in your corner and will definitely be at the debate,” she tweeted in response. Bill Clinton testified under oath in 1998, saying he had a sexual affair with Flowers.

    However, speculation that Hillary would be eyeballing his husband’s former mistress in the front row quickly died earlier today when members of Trump’s campaign on Sunday denied that Flowers was officially invited and said she will not attend. Trump’s VP candidate Mike Pence confirmed Flowers wouldn’t be at the debate, and said his running mate’s tweet was meant to mock Clinton for “trying to distract attention away from this moment in our national life where the American people are going to see a strong contrast” between both major party’s nominees.

    The Indiana governor criticized the Democratic nominee for extending an invitation to Cuban. “Hillary Clinton apparently thinks this is an episode of ‘Shark Tank,’ but this is America,” Pence said on “Fox News Sunday,” referring to the ABC reality-business show Cuban has appeared on as an investor. 

    “It’s serious business” he added as we reported earlier, flipping the table on Hillary. 

    Trump’s campaign manager, Kellyanne Conway, echoed Pence’s comments, saying Flowers isn’t expected to be at the presidential debate as Trump’s guest. “Mr. Trump was putting them on notice that we could certainly invite guests that make it into the head of Hillary Clinton,” Conway said Sunday morning.

    Meanwhile, debate commission Co-Chairman Frank Fahrenkopf warned both major party’s nominees against using their invites to try to disrupt the debate.   

    “We’re going to frown upon — I will tell you this right now — whether or not a Republican or Democrat or anyone else attempts by use of the tickets in placing people in a front-row or not, to try to impact the debate,” he said Saturday on CNN. Then again, having guest “impact the debate” is precisely what America’s population appears to want, judging by the feverish response over the weekend to the tentative proposals to take the mudslining campaign between the two to an unprecedented level. 

    “It’s wrong. We would frown upon Mr. Cuban being in the front row if his purpose is to somehow disrupt the debate. Likewise, if Mr. Trump was going to put someone in the front row to try to impact things.”

    Quote by The Hill, Fahrenkopf said the debate commission has been working with the both campaigns’ staff and doesn’t expect any problems.  “They’re approaching this in a very dignified manner — the way I think it should be approached,” he said.

    That said, on Sunday, members of Clinton’s campaign defended the decision to invite Cuban to the debate, touting his accomplishments and denying it’s an attempt to annoy Trump. Clinton’s chief strategist, Joel Benenson, called Cuban a “successful businessman” whose economic beliefs often match Clinton’s. “I think it’s legitimate to have a businessperson sitting there who’s been advocating for you because of your economic policies,” Benenson said on “Fox News Sunday.”

    Meanwhile, whether Cuban is present or not, Conway, Trump’s campaign manager, praised the GOP nominee’s debate skills, calling him a “brilliant debater.”  “He’s like the Babe Ruth of debating. He really shows up and swings and does a great job,” she said Sunday on ABC’s “This Week.”

    Monday’s debate, moderated by NBC News’s Lester Holt, is expected to be the most watched ever, with an audience that could exceed 100 million people.

    An audience of that size would be something never seen before in U.S. politics.

    Which is also why most of the attention will be on Trump. The Republican presidential nominee has never debated another candidate one-on-one in his short political life. Trump has also never debated in such a quiet setting, the Hill adds.

    As the GOP primary debates sometimes resembled wrestling matches, with an audience applauding and booing loudly depending on what it heard, Trump – a consummate entertainer and TV personality – seized on many of those moments during the primary campaign to turn the tide.

    This time, however, it will be different: At Hofstra University in New York on Monday night, the crowd will be directed to not applaud, cheer or boo, and it will at times feel like two people and a moderator talking in front of a quiet theater audience. 

    How Trump handles this different setting remains to be seen, as experts say the primary debate format played right into his wheelhouse.  “The very crowded stage served him very well,” said David Birdsell, a debate expert and professor at Baruch College, of the primary debate.  “He was able to pick fights, land a quick one-off and then fade into the background, becoming a headline without a lengthy examination of his record and changing policy positions.”

    Trump’s most notable debate moments came not during a protracted back-and-forth on policy, but when he deployed quick one-liners that disarmed his rivals.  While some opponents, like Carly Fiorina at the start and Ted Cruz down the stretch, chose to attack him head on, Trump benefited when other candidates’ battles drew the spotlight, allowing him to pick his spots to strike hard and then retreat.

    Additionally, the events themselves will be significantly longer. Networks loaded up the two-hour primary debates with commercial breaks, giving candidates time to collect themselves as well as shortening the event.  But the general election debate will be a 90-minute commercial-free event, testing the concentration of the Trump in his first one-on-one debate. As the Hill points out, that could put Trump at a disadvantage, both as a candidate outmatched by his opponent’s policy grasp and with a penchant for controversial comments.  

    Trump’s debate prep appears to be less concerned about the former while looking to control the latter. Trump is reportedly taking a more hands-off approach with debate preparations, eschewing full-length test runs and deep-dives into briefing books, according to the New York Times. Aides even have expressed concern that Trump is downplaying the difficulties of staying on top of his game for the full 90 minutes.

     

    Instead, Trump, who once owned a United States Football League team, is scouring game tape, footage from old Clinton debates, in the hopes of finding weaknesses to exploit. 

     

    And his advisers are cautioning him to avoid falling into Clinton’s traps meant to frame him as unstable, and instead focus on hitting his campaign’s major themes.

    Then again, underestimating Trump has proven to be a failure in the past: those who took on Trump in the primary debates caution against taking him lightly—predictions that the Trump train would derail when the political novice took the debate stage fell flat. Frank Sadler, Carly Fiorina’s campaign manager during the primary race, believes it would be foolish to “underestimate Trump.”  “There’s this general thought that he can’t sit there for 90 minutes and answer policy questions in an effective manner,” he said.  “He’s been effective with the media since he came down that escalator. To think in the brand new format that he would be at a disadvantage, I don’t agree.”

    There is also Hillary’s health and stamina: following her recent health shocks, it remains to be seen if Hillary can muster anywhere close to 90 minutes of straight debate without breaks, something that Trump can surely use to his advnatage. 

    Furthermore, many critics point to Trump’s impulsive nature as potentially his undoing, as his campaign’s greatest missteps have come thanks to controversial comments made while deviating from message. But the potential weakness could also turn out to be a key asset.

    Those close to Clinton have told The Hill that she is preparing for “multiple Trumps,” an acknowledgement that they aren’t quite sure who will be standing across the stage from her.  “That’s the big unknown here, and it’s a case where it’s making her prep a little bit harder because she’s got to prepare for different versions of Trump—subdued Trump, aggressive Trump,” MSNBC’s Chuck Todd said Friday on “Andrea Mitchell Reports.”

    “The Trump campaign is enjoying this.”

    What Trump also has going for him are low expectations: his limited debate experience is perhaps the reason why the latest poll by Morning Consult has Trump losing with 29% of registered voters predicting a victory for Trump and 36% predicting Clinton will win. To be sure, Clinton communications director Jennifer Palmieri called low expectations “my biggest concern” during a chat with reporters in the days ahead of the debate on the campaign’s plane, according to ABC News.

    It is understandable: coming out of nowhere, and underestimated from day one, Trump is now in a “dead heat” with Hillary according even to the Washington Post.

    As The Hill concludes, multiple experts have compared the matchup to the 2000 debate, where a wonky Al Gore showed a mastery of policy but rubbed the audience the wrong way as he audibly sighed through George W. Bush’s answers. Bush emerged looking competent, compared to the expectations, and significantly more likable than Gore. And ultimately, he edged out the sitting vice president.  “You have a very similar contest here,” Birdsell said.

    “You have a candidate not expected to be able to talk about policy facing one expected to do an absolutely bang up job. The one who did an OK job could up being seen as the winner because he didn’t just flame out entirely.”

    * * *

    Oh, and Al Gore lost.

    Finally, here is a brief visual summary of the key historical moments in presidential debate history.

     


  • Smoking Hot Wives, Gold, And The Dollar (+ Other Good Stuff)

    By Chris at www.CapitalistExploits.at

    It’s been a while since I did a Q&A, and though I have a number of things I could discuss they will wait for another day for two very important reasons.

    Firstly, by doing a Q&A I can reply to questions which typically takes me a bit shorter than it does to write longer articles. This is important because it’s a Friday night and my wife is looking smoking hot…

    The second point. Oh, I forget what that was. Onto it then…

    “Hi,


    I just downloaded your US$ Bull Market Report from Dec. 2014.  It seems most of your predictions did not work out and the US$ has been in broadly a sideways to slightly up market since then.  The Yen is back to 100.


    Your entire thesis on the US$ Bull Market appears to be based on the notion that US interest rates will rise whilst interest rates everywhere else will stay low or fall or even go negative.


    Doesn’t your recent podcast on owning gold negate the US$ bull stance? With the FED having postponed its tightening cycle several time and the market now starting to doubt the FED will ever raise interest rates, does your stance from 2014 still stand?


     What is your stance on the USD/JPY? It seems the JPY is the new save haven currency which strengthens whenever there is a crisis. Do you still stand by your prediction that the JPY will weaken substantially against the USD?


    Where do you buy the currency options (especially USD/JPY) you refer to in your write-up? Could you kindly let me know which exchange they are traded on? (I have market access to all major exchanges).


     Kind Regards


    R.S”

    Let me break the questions down one by one.

    Dollar Index

    Not sure what charts you’re looking at but to get on the same page here is what we said on November 13, 2014:

    “A bull market in the US Dollar is underway and its magnitude and duration are likely to catch everyone by surprise. I believe it isn’t out of the question for the USD Index to advance by at least 50% within the next 5 years. If this forecast proves correct, there will be profound ramifications for the global economy and many financial markets, particularly emerging markets.”

    The Dollar Report was published a few weeks later so the thesis is the same. At the time it was trading at 86. And today we’re at 95. Didn’t we just catch the biggest move in the last decade?

    DXY Index

    We’ve been bumping and grinding for the last 12 months and we are forming a converging wedge which typically portends a break. I think we break higher. Maybe I’m wrong but that’s where the weight of probability lies for me right now.

    Remember, the dollar spent 10 straight years doing nothing but go down. To expect it to go up in a linear fashion is foolish. It’s not going to happen. Markets don’t work like that. They are non-linear.

    The dollar bull thesis is in part due to an interest rate differential – as you mention – but there is more to it than that. The USD carry trade unwinding is arguably a much bigger force behind a rising dollar than interest rate arbitrage.

    Then there is the fact that on a relative basis, especially politically, the US looks a whole lot less shaky than does Europe or Japan, where Kuroda-san continues on the path to destroy the yen. This is a ridiculously sad situation given that the two podium donuts on show in the US actually look less bad than the clutch of parasites at the helm in Europe. It is what it is.

    USD and Gold

    With regards to being dollar bullish as well as long-term gold bullish I believe we are likely to see both rising simultaneously.

    ————————————–

    Kyle Bass Gold

    ————————————–

    The factors driving the two asset classes are at this point in time working to strengthen both. For more on this you can listen to my discussion with Raoul Pal.

    Yen

    I guess this is not really fair if you’ve not been a long term reader as we put out a special Japan report in January 2012 saying we were shorting the yen. It was at 72. Twelve months later at 89, and hit a high of 125 before moving back to 100 today.

    For me this is a long term trade I’m happy to have on for the next decade. I actually think it’s possible we get back down to 95 before heading much higher. I’m not prepared to buy the yen in anticipation of that but if we get there I’ll be pressing the short trade. This is quite simply something that I think you can set and forget and not be too worried about short-term noise.

    Options on currencies are available via the Saxo platform. If you’re a US citizen then you’re a lepper to Saxo and they don’t want anything to do with you.

    Easy enough to get around by using an offshore (non-US) company to open an account. I don’t know of any other platform that offers options on currencies. Perhaps readers can comment below if they know of any.

    Next question:

    “Thanks for your fantastic blog – it is much appreciated. I would be very interested in your view on two points:


    1. China looks like a Ponzi scheme to me too. However in the tradition of searching for non-bias-confirming views, I come accross the argument that Chinese SOE debt is not as bad as it looks because savings are very high, those savings fund corporate loans, and therefore in China debt is often used as a substitute for raising capital in the equity markets. By this reasoning, a debt for equity swap could at a stroke hugely reduce the debt load. An example of this argument is here:

     

    https://www.project-syndicate.org/commentary/china-moving-from-debt-to-equity-by-andrew-sheng-and-xiao-geng-2016-05


    1. I have heard you talk about the frequency of six-sigma events in today’s markets. This may or may not be remarkable, but I think we have to exercise caution over this interpretation of a statistical measure. Standard deviations are only applicable to normally distributed events, and financial events are certainly very far from normally distributed. I think that the frequency of n-sigma events is just re-enforcing this fact, though of course their increase does point to a change in the climate. Do you agree with this?

     

    Thanks again,

     

    Matthew”

    China, a Ponzi Scheme?

    This argument has been used before. It’s a variation of “we owe it to ourselves so it doesn’t matter”.

    Let’s say you lent money to your cousin Joey who, instead of using using it to grow his business as promised, bought a Bentley (he clearly has terrible taste).

    Since you found that, after he failed to pay you back your money on time, he’s put some mileage on it, taken out an additional loan against the car to access some more cash, and dinged it parallel parking which we can’t really blame him for since it’s such a big ugly sucker. You’re family so it doesn’t matter?

    What about a debt for equity swap? You get the equity in his “ugly as sin” Bentley. But wait, it’s encumbered and when you net out the debt against the equity you realise the equity is close to worthless. Does it matter?

    Here’s the issue. Economists call it pushing on string:

    In 2015, total Chinese government debt increased by a CNY4.6 trillion, or about US$700 billion.

    Problem is, in 2004, one yuan in new debt generated 73 cents in additional GDP. By 2009, this was down to 33 cents. Today, the ratio is less than 1 to 4. You don’t need me to explain to you that when your debt is increasing four times faster than your income you’re heading fast towards the edge of a cliff.

    This is the real tragedy of central bank policy. By these bureaucrats’ warped logic, the fact that the increase in debt is no longer having the desired effect is used as evidence that in fact more debt is required. This lands up being a debt multiplier in that an ever increasing amount of debt is required to achieve the same level of growth. To the point that now we sit with central banks pushing NIRP down our collective throats.

    As I mentioned earlier this week, with the help of some birds to explain the situation, we now await blowback.

    Six Sigma Market Events

    The increase in frequency of such events is unmistakable but not unsurprising.

    It points to a period of time that is unlike the periods of time we’ve been experiencing: unchartered waters. Imbalances have consequences and greater imbalances beget greater consequences.

    Ergo, more 6 sigma events on the horizon.

    Onto the next one:

    “Hi Chris, 

     

    Thank you for continuing to post unique and insightful content on CapEx! Really invaluable insight. One topic I would like to pick your brain on, and which has been a topic of a few of your latest posts, is inflation:

     

    Over the past 8 years we had an incredible amount of asset price inflation due to QE/NIRP etc. as liquidity remained in the financial system. How likely is, in your opinion, that eventually this will be reflected into CPI/consumer goods?

     

    The potential scenarios I see:

     

    On one hand (Scenario 1 – Deflationary Bust) this asset inflation boom might end a-la ’08, as FED raises rates/dollar strengthens triggering a repricing of asset prices 

     

    On the other hand (Scenario 2 – Stagflation), the FED might stay put (after a small raise of benchmark rates) and fiscal policy on a worldwide scale is more accommodating; this will unleash a wave of wage/consumer goods inflation.

     

    I used to think that the most likely scenario was Deflationary Bust followed by even more aggressive QE/fiscal policy which in turn would lead to Stagflation. Now though I am more inclined to think that Scenario 2 is a real possibility (because of structural impossibility of raising rates significantly without triggering a crisis; additionally policy speeches seems to be shifting towards more fiscal easing as well lately). 

     

    What are your thoughts? And how should Scenario 2 be traded – short rates or short currencies? So far currencies have been the release valve, but are we going to assist to a paradigm shift whereby rates will have be forced upwards (by inflation expectations/market or as central banks catch up)? Apologies for the long e-mail.

     

    Thanks,

     

    M”

    Firstly, thanks for the kind words.

    Inflation Showing Up in CPI

    To your question on inflation showing up in CPI: you’re dead right. We’ve had asset inflation largely in financial assets to an extent that is truly frightening.

    Consider that 50 years ago in pretty much any developed country in the world a home was affordable with just one working parent, healthcare was affordable, college tuition could be saved and paid for by weekend and holiday jobs at the local supermarket checkout counter, and televisions and phones were luxury expensive items.

    Today everyone, including kids, has a smartphone, everyone has a TV that can’t be fitted through a doorway without gymnastics. And yet home ownership, especially for millennials, is a pipe dream, college tuition can no longer be paid for by summer jobs, and healthcare insurance requires you to sell your kidney to pay for it, which of course defeats the purpose.

    Many consumer goods, on the other hand, have been experiencing deflation though this is due to tech innovation and geographical labour cost arbitrage.

    I don’t know when inflation shows up in consumer goods.

    Obviously in a bond market rout and currency crisis then inflation typically takes hold in every asset class, including consumer goods. Given that I believe there is no more GDP to be juiced out of the global economy via credit fuelled policies (NIRP, ZIRP), I think it’s prudent to be looking at those asset classes which are in the “need to have” basket of consumer goods.

    For example I’m beginning to get pretty interested in the soft commodities. If you take a look at the charts alone it’s hard not to get a little excited.

    Regarding fiscal policy. As I mentioned recently when chatting with Erik Townsend, I think fiscal policy is the next big hit, certainly in the US.

    Should that bring even a whiff of inflation it could spell real trouble for what is now a bond market that is more sensitive to price movement than it’s ever been!

    Your question was how to trade. Rates or currencies? Both – they’re reflexively related.

    Next…

    “Hey Chris,  

     

    I’m a retired medical doctor and consider myself well read and well versed in world affairs. The first article I read of yours roughly 2 years ago really irked me. It angered me because at the time I was convinced the dollar was going to hell. I’d been reading a lot of material published by [omitted] and it was a constantly repeated theme. I felt like it was the only thing that mattered and I automatically rejected anything that contradicted what I wanted to believe. I was invested in emerging markets and foreign currencies as a result. I honestly don’t know what made me sign up for your free content as I recall thinking you were a complete idiot. Perhaps I simply was convinced you would be wrong and wanted to see your ideas proven for the garbage I was convinced they were.  

     

    It only took a few more articles since reading that first one, and as much as I was ready to hate you and see you proven wrong I found myself nodding my head and smiling at your ability to dispassionately see and explain what are very complex financial, social and political issues. I can tell you that over the course of time, I have a newfound understanding of our world, am certainly less dogmatic than I used to be, and your work together with Realvision TV which you introduced me to has played a significant part in that.  

     

    You Sir have yourself a dedicated reader.  

     

    If you would be so kind, (and I feel bad for asking for this since you’ve given me so much and I’ve given you an email address) you mentioned in an article a while back that the HK market was worth a look. I decided for the first time to act on your thoughts and bought the iShares MSCI Hong Kong ETF. I’m up over 10% and would love to know more on why you thought HK equities were a good bet.

     

    Deepest thanks

     

    AJ”

    Wow, thanks. I’m glad you no longer hate me. That’s a decent start.

    One quick comment and I know I’ve mentioned this before but it bears repeating. The market DOESN’T care what you or I think. It doesn’t care about opinions, it doesn’t care about who said what or how rich or famous they may be. Dogmatism in investing is lethal. Nobody knows all the answers. Certainly not I.

    Question everything and whenever someone is yelling and screaming that XYZ is absolutely going to happen it’s probably a sign to be cautious, especially if they’re selling something. I know a lot of incredibly smart, successful investors, and not one of them thinks they absolutely know what is going to happen. It’s all just probabilities and risk management.

    In any event, what you’re referring to was an issue of “World Out Of Whack” back in June:

    “While the focus today is on overvalued RE markets, as an investor I can’t help myself from pointing out that with a P/E ratio of just 9x, Hong Kong’s equity markets are today the cheapest in the world, with the Hang Seng Index trading at the biggest discount to global shares in 15 years.

     

    As a reference point consider that most major stock markets typically trade at a P/E of between 15-20x, so we’re looking at an equity market some 40-50% of its highs and an overvalued real estate market at the same time.”

    Here is the ETF you bought. We’re up about 14% this quarter:

    EWH ETF

    Cheaper valuations obviously, a stable currency pegged to the USD (for now at least), and the coming second exchange link with China seem to point towards more favourable setup for HK equities. Where would be the first place you’d go if you were a mainland Chinese looking to diversify out of China?

    That’s all for now and my apologies to all those who email me and who’s questions go unanswered. It’s not because I don’t love you too.

    Have an awesome weekend wherever you are. I’m going to go find that wife of mine…

    – Chris

    “My most brilliant achievement was my ability to be able to persuade my wife to marry me.” —  Winston Churchill

    ————————————–

    Liked this article? Don’t miss our future missives and podcasts, and

    get access to free subscriber-only content here.

    ————————————–

  • A Sunni Muslim Asks: Is "Radical Islam" The Problem Or Is "Islam" The Problem?

    Submitted by Michael Shedlock via MishTalk.com,

    In 2015, President Obama told CNN that 99.9 Percent of Muslims Reject Radical Islam. He made the comments in response to a question about the White House avoiding using the phrase “Islamic terrorists.”

    Hillary Clinton says “Let’s be clear: Islam is not our adversary. Muslims are peaceful and tolerant people and have nothing whatsoever to do with terrorism.”

    Are they correct?

    Obama Rejects Religious War

    “It’s absolutely true that I reject the notion that somehow that [Isis] creates a religious war”.

    Let’s Be Clear

    Breitbart provides this Hillary Islam Flashback.

    Clinton claimed that using the phrase “radical Islamic terrorism” to describe the previous radical Islamic terrorist attack in France — the Paris massacre, which occurred just a few days before she spoke — “gives these criminals, these murderers, more standing than they deserve, and it actually plays into their hands by alienating partners we need by our side.”

     

    “In the end it didn’t matter what kind of terrorist we called [Osama] bin Laden. It mattered that we killed bin Laden,” Clinton sniffed.

     

    By June, Clinton had grown uncomfortable enough with public perceptions of her terrorist-fighting credentials to assure a CNN audience that she was super-duper comfortable with saying the words “radical Islam.”

     

    “From my perspective, it matters what we do more than what we say. And it mattered we got bin Laden, not what name we called him. I have clearly said we – whether you call it radical jihadism or radical Islamism, I’m happy to say either. I think they mean the same thing,” she said, making a game effort to keep her we got bin Laden without calling him a jihadi talking point alive.

     

    However, when she made her desperate call to Bill O’Reilly after the Nice atrocity unfolded, she was suddenly uncomfortable with the “radical Islam” formulation again, going with “these radical jihadist groups” instead. Perhaps Mrs. Clinton could tell us about some moderate jihadist groups, for the purposes of comparison.

    A Sunni Muslim Chimes In

    Here’s a video that I would like you to play. The video is by a Sunni Muslim. It’s called By The Numbers – The Untold Story of Muslim Opinions & Demographics.

    By the Numbers is an honest and open discussion about Muslim opinions and demographics. Narrated by Raheel Raza, president of Muslims Facing Tomorrow, this short film is about the acceptance that radical Islam is a bigger problem than most politically correct governments and individuals are ready to admit. Is ISIS, the Islamic State, trying to penetrate the U.S. with the refugee influx? Are Muslims radicalized on U.S. soil? Are organizations such as CAIR, who purport to represent American Muslims accepting and liberal or radicalized with links to terror organizations.

     

    Question of the Month

     

    Fundamentally, it may be fair to ask “Is religion in general the problem?”

     

     

  • The Obama Gun "Super Owner" – New Study Finds 50% Of Guns Owned By Just 3% Of Population

    A recent Harvard study of the demographics of gun ownership in the United States yielded a fairly shocking discovery, namely the emergence of the Obama gun “Super Owner.”  The study, entitled “The Stock and Flow of US Firearms: Results from the 2015 National Firearms Survey“, was conducted by the Harvard School of Public Health and found that just 14% of all gun owners, or 7.6mm adults and 3% of the total U.S. population, possessed 50% of all guns owned by civilians in the country.  Moreover, with a total stock of 270mm civilian-owned guns in the U.S., that implies that these “super owners” possess an average of nearly 18 guns per person. 

    Gun owning respondents owned an average of 4.85 firearms (range: 1-140); the median gun owner reported owning approximately two guns. As can be seen in Figure 3, approximately half (48%) of gun owners report owning 1 or 2 guns, accounting for 14% of the total US gun stock, while those who own 10 or more guns (8% of all gun owners), own 39% of the gun stock. Put another way, one half of the gun stock (~130 million guns) is owned by approximately 86% of gun owners, while the other half is owned by 14% of gun owners (14% of gun owners equals 7.6 million adults, or 3% of the adult US population).

    Guns

     

    Another startling discovery in the data, though “oddly” not highlighted in the report, is that the surge in gun ownership per capita seemed to coincide with the start of the Obama presidency and growing rhetoric over new gun regulations.  Per the chart below, over the past 20 years, gun ownership per U.S. adult hovered around 1 from 1993 through 2007 but then surged starting in 2008 as an Obama presidency became increasingly likely.  

    Guns

     

    This trend is also reflected in annual guns sales which floated between 4-6mm units per year before surging in 2008.

    Guns

     

    And perhaps no one has benefited more than Smith and Wesson shareholders…

    Guns

     

    Meanwhile, the less surprising takeaway from the study was that conservative, veterans living in rural areas were the most likely people to own guns.  Shocking.

    Guns

     

    Guess that, like with military intervention, new gun regulations don’t really work that well if they’re advertised well in advance. 

     

    Full report:

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 25th September 2016

  • Washington Mall Shooter Caught: Suspect Is 20 Year Old Turk

    Following last night’s shooting at the Cascade Mall in Burlington, WA mall, when an unidentified gunman killed 5 then managed to slip away from authorities for nearly 24 hours, moments ago the Washington State Patrol tweeted that the shooter has, after a daylong manhunt, been captured.

    The man was arrested without incident, and is in custody, said Sgt. Keith Leary, of the Washington State Patrol.

    Below is a photo of the arrest courtesy of Q13fox

    As reported early this morning, the suspect fled the Cascade Mall after the deadly shooting at Macy’s. The motive behind his shooting is still not yet known. 

    While the police previously described the mall shooter as Hispanic, according to unconfirmed reports – as the police still hasn’t released the suspect’s name – the identity of the shooter is Arcan Cetin, aged 20…

    …. who according to his Facebook profile is originally Turkish, from the city of Adana.

    Several photos of Cetin’s Myspace page were released on twitter, suggesting he had a fascination with weapons:

    Some more of his facebook pictures:

    And then there was this odd tweet from January 2015:

    … followed by this one from April, 2015

  • Bill Clinton's Ex-Girlfriend, Gennifer Flowers, Confirms She Will "Definitely Be At The Debate"

    Following Trump's earlier tweet, "If dopey Mark Cuban of failed Benefactor fame wants to sit in the front row, perhaps I will put Gennifer Flowers right alongside of him!"; Bill Clinton's old girlfriend confirmed she will indeed be attending the debates on Monday.

    In response to Hillary Clinton giving Mark Cuban front row seats at the debate, Trump tweeted:

    As a reminder, Bill Clinton testified under oath in 1998 that he had a sexual affair with Flowers.

    In his January 1998 deposition, the President, though finally confirming a sexual encounter with Ms. Flowers, was precise in denying Ms. Willey's report that he had sought to kiss her and feel her breasts in an encounter in his private dining room off the Oval Office.

    Trump said earlier this week that he did not plan to bring up the Clintons’ marriage at the debate.

    “I don’t think I’m looking to do that Bill. I don’t know what I’m going to do that exactly,” Trump said during an interview on “The O’Reilly Factor.” “It depends on what level she hits you with, if she’s fair, if it’s unfair, but certainly I’m not looking to do that.”

    That may have changed, however. To be sure, Saturday isn't the first time Trump has referenced Bill Clinton's infidelity. He brought the former president's sex scandals into the campaign late last year around the time Hillary Clinton announced her husband would join her on the campaign trail. At the time, she had recently accused Trump of having a "penchant for sexism" over his charge that she had been "schlonged" in the 2008 primary.

    "Hillary Clinton has announced that she is letting her husband out to campaign but HE'S DEMONSTRATED A PENCHANT FOR SEXISM, so inappropriate!" Trump tweeted in December. Trump later labeled Clinton "one of the great women abusers of all time."

    Sure enough, just to make Monday's debate even more memorable, moments ago Gennifer Flowers confirmed she will be at the debate.

    Grab your popcorn because the "best. election. ever" just got even better.

     

  • Charlotte Police Release Dashcam, Body-Cam Footage Of Keith Scott's Death, Chief Says "Absolutely" Had A Gun

    Update:  Charlotte police have just released the following bodycam footage of the event.

    Here is the dashcam footage…

     

     

    And additionally, the Charlotte Police released evidence images…

     

    *  *  *

    As we detailed earlier, having exclaimed "drop the gun" 11 times in the video of the fatal shooting of Keith Scott provided by his mother, Charlotte police have just stated in a press cobnference that they have agreed to release the body-cam video of the event. Despite earlier saying that it wouldn't release police video for fear of compromising its review, the State Bureau of Investigation has succumbed to public pressure despite a lack of "absolute, definitive, visual evidence" that Scott brandished a weapon at the officers.

    Keith Scott's mother's view of the event…

    OFFICER: Hands up!

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: Don’t shoot him. Don’t shoot him. He has no weapon. He has no weapon. Don’t shoot him.

    OFFICER: Don’t shoot. Drop the gun. Drop the fucking gun.

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: Don’t shoot him. Don’t shoot him.

    OFFICER: Drop the gun.

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: He didn’t do anything.

    OFFICER: Drop the gun. Drop the gun.

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: He doesn’t have a gun. He has a T.B.I. (Traumatic Brain Injury).

    OFFICER: Drop the gun.

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: He is not going to do anything to you guys.

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: He just took his medicine.

    OFFICER: Drop the gun. Let me get a fucking baton over here. [muffled]

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: Keith, don’t let them break the windows. Come on out the car.

    OFFICER: [muffled]

    OFFICER:Drop the gun.

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: Keith! Don’t you do it.

    OFFICER: Drop the gun.

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: Keith, get out the car. Keith! Keith! Don’t you do it! Don’t you do it! Keith!

    OFFICER: Drop the gun.

    RAKEYIA SCOTT:Keith! Keith! Keith! Don’t you do it! [SHOTS]

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: Fuck. Did you shoot him? Did you shoot him? Did you shoot him? He better not be fucking dead. He better not be fucking dead. I know that fucking much. I know that much. He better not be dead. I’m not going to come near you. I’m going to record, though. I’m not coming near you. I’m going to record, though. He better be alive because …I come You better be alive. How about that?Yes, we here, over here at 50 … 50 …9453 Lexington Court. These are the police officers that shot my husband, and he better live. He better live. Because he didn’t do nothing to them.

    OFFICER: Is everybody good? Are you good?

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: He good. Nobody … touch nobody, so they’re all good.

    OFFICER: You good?

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: I know he better live. I know he better live. How about that I’m not coming to you guys, but he’d better live. He better live. You all hear it, you see this, right? He better live.

    OFFICER: [muffled]

    RAKEYIA SCOTT: He better live. I swear, he better live. Yep, he better live. He better fucking live. He better live. Where is…He better fucking live, and I can’t even leave the damn…I ain’t going nowhere. I’m staying in the same damn spot. What the fuck. That’s O.K. did you all call the police? I mean, did you all call an ambulance?

     

    Some have argued that there was a gun seen…

    *  *  *

    Press Conference has concluded.

    The body-cam footage will be released by 1715ET.

    During the press conference, Charlotte police chief Putney said "Officers are absolutely not being charged by me, but again, there's another investigation ongoing." Putney said that Scott was "absolutely in possession of a handgun," and that officers also saw marijuana in his car — prompting officers to act.

    • There was a crime that Keith Scott had committed that led cops to him and "the gun exacerbated the encounter."
    • He can't assure Keith Scott's wife and 7 children that every effort was made to avoid deadly force.
    • Officers Are ‘Absolutely Not Being Charged By Me at This Point’
    • Keith Scott Had Marijuana and Gun, Prompting Police Encounter
    • "No single piece of evidence…proves all the complexities" of Keith Lamont Scott case
    • Police have said Scott was shot on Tuesday because he refused commands to drop a handgun. Residents have said he was unarmed. Putney says Scott "absolutely" had a gun but that it's not shown in his hand in the videos.

     

  • Here's How CIA Puppet-Masters Are Deliberately Picking A 'World War III Level' Fight

    Via DasiyLuther.com,

    It’s really quite embarrassing on a global scale when members of our own government seem to be deliberately trying to pick fights with people who aren’t interested in fighting with us. If you’ve traveled outside of the United States much, you probably know that we Americans have a rather negative reputation off of our own shores. Now, generally speaking, that isn’t our fault as individuals. You and I don’t create headlines that make waves throughout Europe and Asia.

    While average Americans aren’t directly responsible for this, our federal officials are. I’ve written recently about President Obama doing things in Syria that are worsening the conflict there. I’ve also written about the fact that he and Russian President Vladimir Putin are starting to butt heads. And finally, I’ve warned time and time again that war is upon us – and everyone knows but the US.

    Michael Morell is the director of the CIA. Here’s a little blurb from Wikipedia about him.

    Michael Joseph Morell (born September 4, 1958) is an American intelligence analyst. He served as the deputy director of the Central Intelligence Agency as well as its acting director twice, first in 2011 and then from 2012 to 2013. Since November 2013, he has been a Senior Counselor to Beacon Global Strategies LLC. He is a proponent of the CIA’s use of enhanced interrogation techniques which many consider to be torture, and is also a proponent of the CIA’s targeted killings by drones.

    Wow, and just think. He’s a guy that has almost unfettered power to call a hit on anyone in the world.

    This video shows us how the global situation is being manipulated towards war by our own Central Intelligence Agency. Watch as Michael Morell boasts about how the CIA operates – and then watch as his boasting comes to life.

    This is the creepy, sadistic little puppetmaster that is going to deliberately get our sons and daughters sent off to fight the next war “for our freedom.” This is just more proof that nothing we see on the mainstream news is as it seems and that the federal alphabet agencies are never what they present themselves to be.

  • Extensive Immigration Study Finds Impact On "Aggregate Wealth Of Natives Is, At Best, A Wash"

    Immigration has been and will continue to be a hot button topic in the 2016 presidential campaign.  Trump has called for a wall along the U.S. southern border with Mexico and a halt to all immigration from certain “countries of concern to national security.”  Meanwhile, Hillary has called for more relaxed immigration policies that would grant illegal immigrants a path to citizenship and a surge in Syrian refugees. 

    But, no matter where you stand politically on immigration, a group of the nation’s “smartest” professors from the most elite schools in the country recently came together to publish a 500-page study for the “National Academies of Sciences, Engineering and Medicine” on the economic and fiscal impacts of immigration.  After what must have been countless months of research, the report seems to confirm what most people could have derived from applying simple logic, namely that while immigration expands the economy it also negatively impacts the employment of low-skilled native workers and places undue burden on federal and state entitlements like food assistance programs and Medicaid.

    The full 500-page immigration study can be reviewed at the end of this post but here are the key takeaways…

    First, the study finds that the lower median age of immigrants is a positive offset to the aging U.S. population and serves to enlarge the economy but notes that the key beneficiaries are the immigrants themselves and not the native citizens.

    Immigration enlarges the economy while leaving the native population slightly better off on average, but the greatest beneficiaries of immigration are the immigrants themselves as they avail themselves of opportunities not available to them in their home countries.

    Immigration

     

    That said, low-skilled immigrants, which represented nearly 50% of the total in 2012, were found to have a higher employment rates than low-skilled natives indicating that U.S. citizens are being displaced at least at the lower bound of the income spectrum. 

    Shortly after arrival in the United States, immigrant men—especially recent cohorts—experience a disadvantage relative to native-born men in terms of the probability of being employed. However, for cohorts of immigrants arriving since the 1970s, after this initial period of adjustment in which their probability of employment is lower, they became slightly more likely to be employed than their native-born peers. The higher employment rate among immigrant men is mainly represented in the population with education of a high school degree or less.

     

    Immigration

     

    Immigrations

     

    Finally, first-generation immigrants were found to be more costly for entitlement programs than native-born citizens.

    Beyond wage and employment considerations, policy makers and the general public are interested in the impact that an expanding population, and immigration in particular, has on public finances and the sustainability of government programs. All population subgroups contribute to government finances by paying taxes and add to expenditures by consuming public services—but the levels differ. On average, individuals in the first generation are more costly to governments, mainly at the state and local levels, than are the native-born generations; however, immigrants’ children—the second generation—are among the strongest economic and fiscal contributors in the population.

     

    Immigrant households’ use of food assistance programs and Medicaid is much higher than that of native-headed households—not as a result of not working (in 2009, 95 percent of immigrant households with children had at least one person working) but because of lower levels of education and income.

    But perhaps, Harvard University’s George Borjas summed up the study best by telling the Wall Street Journal simply that “the impact of immigration on the aggregate wealth of natives is, at best, a wash.

     

  • America's 24/7 Circus Maximus

    Authored by Pepe Escobar, originally posted op-ed via SputnikNews.com,

    Perplexed global public opinion holds its breath at the (circus) best American “democracy” is able to conjure.

    The first cage match this coming Monday between a Queen of War profiting from a mighty (Clinton) Cash Machine and a billionaire uber-narcissist adored by a “basket of deplorables”.

    This is a circus quite fitting for a self-described “indispensable nation” where “evil” has been propelled – seriously – to the status of philosophical category.

    For the basket of deplorables, and even beyond their circle, the temptation is immense to equate voting for Donald Trump with raising a finger against the establishment.

    Ultra-savvy at playing mainstream media for invaluable free publicity, elevating Outrageousness to an art form and being impervious to irony and derision, Trump has been a master at tapping wave after wave of anger against the new liberal elite — including a nomenklatura of crypto-intellectual Ivy league-educated “experts” who could not give a damn about understanding the (real world) consequences of United States Government (USG) policies.  The anger is manifested by declassified blue collars, the unemployed, the functionally illiterate, white trash. Whatever you call them, they are the excluded form the Neoliberal Banquet, not only economically but also culturally. But this being Trump, a master of self-promotion, the battle is more like Ego against The Establishment. And it gets juicier when we learn from powerful, discreet New York-based interests – supporters of Trump’s platform — about who’s really winning:

    The Trump campaign is hardly spending any money at all and holding all over. They may use their money in the last month after the debates if Hillary recovers for those debates from what appears to be an attack of Parkinson’s. He has a shot though no matter who wins I predict there will be peace with Russia; the oil price will rise; imports from Asia of military parts will be repatriated and rigging of currencies is over; there will be offsetting measures to stop the flood of immigrants and products under mis-valued currencies. The masters do not lose.”

    The “masters” are of course the Masters of the Universe who really run the USG.

    And here’s the clincher on how’s in control:

    Both sides are controlled and that explains everything. Lenin said that the way to defeat our opponents is to take over their leadership of the opponent. Look at the Moral Majority which Jerry Falwell disbanded when it became too powerful.  Look at Ross Perot who exited when he started making a real dent. Both were taken care of and Ross made money out of it.”

     

    “Their internal lingo for it is the concept of  “dynamic silence”. This is a technique by the masters to block out all news coverage of let’s say a Nazi so that he could gain no following. That they could have done to Trump if he were not theirs. Who could have complained? He was just an apolitical real estate operator that no one was interested in.”

     

    “So what do we have in the end? An entertaining gladiatorial contest that they control both sides of and the winner gets all the money — as with the Clinton Foundation. And the public is no wiser.”

    The 24/7 Circus Maximus 

    There are subtle gradations to this scenario. Rothschild interests are not supporting Trump – according to these well-connected sources, because Trump has not been anointed by the club and is thus unreliable. They recall, for instance, how “Greenspan was so incompetent that Wall Street leaders had to give him trades so he could make money before they put him as the head of Federal Reserve. Then he was so out of it that they had to direct his every move as he had no comprehension what they do.” “They”, of course, meaning Rothschild interests.   On the Cold War 2.0 front, things are even hazier. Since 2010, when Obama was ordered to keep the US nuclear first-strike strategy, Russia and China know where this is heading. It’s no wonder Trump is being relentlessly attacked as Putin’s own Trojan Horse – because he’s against Cold War 2.0 and the demonization of Russia.

    But the Pentagon’s strident Ash Carter, soon out of a job, is one thing; another thing entirely is what the Masters of the Universe really want, according to these Trump-supporting sources; “Hillary would be following Trump’s guidelines should she win, as the US military will explain to her that she has no other options based on Russian military superiority in submarines, and defensive and offensive missiles. Trump’s policies are wise.”

    There’s even a P.R. move that could literally devastate the already wobbly Hillary campaign:

    “Hillary’s reckless threats against Russia, risking nuclear war, could bring back the Lyndon Johnson TV ads against Goldwater by Donald Trump, where we had a little child in a meadow picking flowers while a nuclear bomb goes off. It was an ad of genius and destroyed Goldwater. The first strike nuclear attack policy and the reckless provocations combine to form an excellent Johnson style ad. This time Trump can use it against the Democrats, who have created almost all the wars in the last 125 years.”

    The daisy cutter ad is here.

    A Force for Farce?

    Even considering that virtually the whole US establishment – from the Beltway nomenklatura to Wall Street — is arrayed against him, the jury is still out on whether Trump is a real threat to their interests.

    Because Trump could also be the perfect Trojan Horse. Evidence relies for instance on his appointment of perfect insiders Larry Kudlow and Steven Moore as his senior economic advisors. That’s the Trump as a Force for Farce scenario. So “dynamic silence” seems to be the rule. Here’s how dynamic silence works;

    If you oppose those above the President, the news media blacks you out and the masses do not hear anything, so how can they be stirred up? Donald is an insider and he represents the military industrial complex including the CIA, DIA, etc. They will deny it, of course, so they have deniability and he can say he is against the establishment when he is an insider.”

     

    “That is the first line of defense. If you manage to outsmart them, then they characterize you as a nut. That is the second line of defense.

     

    Now, if you persist in making them uncomfortable, then you end up as William Colby, Vince Forster or Jack Kennedy.  Richard Nixon was ousted and he went quietly so that, to quote Tricky Dick, “I am not going to end up as Jack” as he went out the back door of the White House.”

     

    The key here is Donald is receiving more publicity than Hillary, and by attacking him for being an America Firster his polls have risen dramatically. The public loves it so the Masters of the Universe are helping him. The military industries have to be repatriated as we no longer control the seas and this will require either currency adjustments or tariffs. Hence, Donald’s correct calls for an end to currency rigging which had as part of their purpose the building up of Germany and Japan at the sacrifice of our industries. Absurd that we did that but that is how it was. That is ending now with Donald and the emergency situation of lack of control of the Pacific Ocean for the component transportation by sea for our military production. Japan and Germany will be cut loose.”

     

    Brzezinski said that if any opponent leaps ahead of the United States militarily, the US ceases to be a global power. That is the case and the military knows it.  And Trump knows it or he would not have said that much. They need a crash program to catch up. That costs big money.  It will probably require force and base reductions and an increase in technological expenditure in a massive way. That is what the Russians did. They can obtain this from massively reducing the welfare transfers on illegal immigrants. That is what Donald is committed to.”

    If this analysis is correct, it ties in with Trump’s push to organize an immediate rapprochement with Russia in case he’s elected, so the US industrial-military-surveillance complex can catch up and at least try to remedy the danger of losing the next war Hillary and her own  neocon bag of deplorables are so bullish on.

    As we approach the first cage match, the jury is still out on whether the Queen of War may lose the election because millennials absolutely detest her, because the “basket of deplorables” absolutely detests her, or both.

    But one thing seems to be certain in the whole Les Deplorables saga – at least for those Masters of the Universe-connected sources; who the real winner will be. So let’s give them the last word, for now; “It will be very difficult for Hillary to beat Trump in a debate as he is quick on his feet and will take no prisoners. Let me say this. If Hillary were to win, and we don’t think she will, she will do what she is told and follow the same policies as Trump would.

  • "Eight Election Trades For November 8th"

    No matter the outcome of the presidential election, according to BofA’s Chief Investment Strategist, Michael Hartnett, 2017 will likely be a year of small absolute returns as the bank expects higher rates will collide with high bond and equity valuations, but it will be a year of big rotations “as investors shift from ZIRP winners like bonds, US, growth stocks to ZIRP losers like commodities, banks and Japan”, where BofA forecasts 20,000 on Nikkei, although for that to happen the currency would have to implode in what may be a terminal loss of faith in the central bank.

    Still, with all attention now focused on the key risk event until a potential December rate hike, namely the November 8 presidential election, BofA provides 8 specific election trades for the election.

    In a note titled “Eight election trades for Nov 8th”, Hartnett shares a variety of trade ideas, some “election-specific and some result-dependent: long VIX futures; long AUDUSD vol; long TIPS;  long global E-commerce, short fast restaurants (inequality); long US materials and largecap banks (fiscal); long US small caps, short emerging markets (Trump protectionist); long gold, short EU banks (Trump geopolitics); long Mexican peso (Clinton victory).”

    This is what he says:

    On November 8th, the US Presidential election will take place. Below we list eight trades, all specific to the election, some applicable to whoever wins, some dependent on the election result:

    Long VIX futures. It seems an obvious trade, but the election is likely to be close (see latest projected electoral college result – Chart 4). There could even be a statistical tie in the Electoral College if Trump wins FL, OH, NC, WI, IA, and Clinton wins PA, VA, CO, NV, MI, NH, arguably the most volatility-inducing event of all. VIX futures are the most liquid expression of volatility, and ahead of the first Presidential debate, the cost of a Nov’16 hedge has fallen to the 19th percentile vs. the past year.

    Long AUDUSD volatility. One way to invest in a risk-off scenario in the event of a Trump victory is long AUDUSD volatility. In our most recent FMS, a Republican victory was seen as a much greater “tail risk” for markets than a Democratic win. Trump has a more protectionist stance, and has threatened import tariffs against China, a stance that would unsettle Asian FX markets. David Woo recommends buying AUDUSD volatility to hedge election uncertainty. AUDUSD volatility is correlated with quant-fund selloffs: it is a top hedge for our BofAML MAST index.

    Long TIPS. Populism is on the rise across the globe and both candidates have redistributive policies targeted at raising wages and reducing inequality. This could lead to higher inflation. It could lead to stagflation. Either way, it will likely be positive for TIPS.

    Long Main Street, short Wall Street. Both candidates want to boost Main Street rather than Wall Street and thus propose higher minimum wages, paid family leave and higher taxation on the rich. This would be positive for US municipal bonds (U0A0). Main Street-Wall Street pair trades: long global E-commerce (BIGECOM), short fast restaurants (BINAFCRC); long mass retailers (BRUSMASS), short luxury goods makers (SPGLGUP).

    Long fiscal stimulus. Best way to leverage fiscal stimulus under either president is via infrastructure spending and defense spending. Clinton has proposed $1.65tn of additional fiscal spending and Trump has proposed $2tn, according to the justreleased Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget report; Congress-approved budgets are likely to be significantly lower. Nonetheless, the direction is clearly toward more fiscal stimulus. Long US aerospace & defense (S5AEROX), US materials (S5MATR), and large-cap banks (S5BANKX). Fiscal stimulus is the primary reason our rates strategists see higher US bond yields in 2017.

    Protectionism pair-trade: anti-globalization is on the rise, and Trump has a more isolationist/protectionist agenda; our economists believe that the Trans-Pacific Partnership is at greater risk under Trump; a reduction in global trade would likely be most negative for EM and the mercantilist economies of Germany and Japan; should US protectionism lead to a bout of inflation in the US, we think US small caps would benefit from inflation and have less foreign exposure. In our view, the best protectionist pair trade: long US small caps (RTY), short emerging markets (MXEF).

    Geopolitical pair-trades: a Trump win could mean lower capital flows to the US, a rise in Treasury yields, and a weaker US dollar, all of which would be positive for gold. A Trump victory would also raise expectations that populist parties in Europe in 2017 could rise to power and increase the European Union disintegration risk premium. Long gold, short European banks (SX7E).

    Short USD/MXN on a Clinton victory as MXN appears 15% undervalued after better Trump polls. Long health care services (SPSIHPTR), short biotech (XNBI). Best way to leverage a Clinton win, with promised tax break for health care services versus higher pharmaceutical regulation.

  • Dead People Are Voting In The Key Swing State Of Colorado

    Colorado has been a key swing state in recent presidential elections after flip-flopping back and forth between support for Democratic and Republican candidates.  Obama won the state in the past two elections but George Bush prevailed for the two preceding contests while Bob Dole narrowly eked out a victory against Clinton in 1996. 

    That said, the margin of victory has often been very tight in Colorado which is what makes the recent discovery of voter fraud there so concerning.  An investigation by CBS Denver recently found that dozens of deceased Colorado citizens continued voting multiple years after their death…even though Colorado Secretary of State Wayne Williams assured CBS that “it is impossible to vote from the grave legally.”  While we’re disturbed by the voter fraud in Colorado, we’re so glad that the legality of the issue could be cleared up so easily. 

    According to CBS, one of the most glaring cases of voter fraud they found was of Sara Sosa who lived in Colorado Springs. Sosa died on Oct. 14, 2009 but CBS found that she continued to cast her ballot in 2010, 2011, 2012 and 2013.  Likewise, her husband, Miguel, died on Sept. 26, 2008 but voted later in 2009.

    Colorado’s Secretary of State confirmed the cases of voter fraud discovered by CBS, saying:

    “We do believe there were several instances of potential vote fraud that occurred.  It shows there is the potential for fraud.  It’s not a perfect system. There are some gaps.”

     

    Of course Colorado isn’t the only place where voter fraud occurs.  Project Veritas recently recorded a  series videos in Michigan showing just how easy it is to vote as someone else.  In the following video, the Project Veritas journalist claims she is Jocelyn Benson, the Dean of Wayne State University Law School, but that she lost her ID.  The “Poll Supervisor” is quick to reassure Mrs. Benson that as long as she signs the affidavit on the back of the ballot she is free to vote.  When the journalist pushes back and insists that she feels an obligation to prove her identity the Poll Supervisor reassures her that “nobody can vote twice” because if the real Jocelyn Benson subsequently comes in she won’t be able to vote “because you already voted.”  Perfect logic if we understand it correctly.  So just to clarify, each registered voter only gets one ballot…great, this seems reasonable…but it doesn’t necessarily matter so much who casts that ballot…wait, what?

    PV Journalist:  “I feel like I should prove that I am who I am.”

     

    Poll Supervisor:  “Your word is your proof is right here.

     

    PV Journalist:  “And that’s fine?”

     

    Poll Supervisor:  “Yup.  Because if somebody else comes in and says that they’re you, they can’t because you already voted.  So, you can’t vote twice, nobody can vote twice.  So once you vote, I don’t care who you are.

     

    PV Journalist:  “You guys are fine with me just voting.”

     

    Poll Supervisor:  “Yup I’m fine.  You’re not the first one that’s left you ID at home.

     

     

     

    All signs point to a very interesting 2016 election.  Which candidate do you think appeals to dead voters the most?

  • Foreign Buying Plummets In Vancouver: Sales To Foreigners Crash 96%

    China’s favorite offshore money laundering hub is officially no longer accepting its money.

    According to data released by British Columbia’s Ministry of Finance on Thursday, foreign investors officially disappeared from Vancouver’s property market last month after the local government imposed a 15% surcharge to curb a record-shattering surge in home prices. Overseas buyers accounted for a paltry 0.7% of the C$6.5 billion of residential real estate purchases in August in Metro Vancouver; this represents a 96% plunge from the seven weeks prior, when foreigners were responsible for 16.5% of transactions by value.

    According to the latest data overseas buyers snapped up C$2.3 billion of homes in the seven weeks before the tax was imposed, and less than C$50 million in the next four weeks. The government began collecting data on citizenship in home purchases on June 10. The ministry said auditors are checking citizenship or permanent residency declarations made by buyers and also reviewing transactions to determine if any were structured to avoid tax (spoiler alert: most of them were).

    Across the province, the participation of foreigners dropped to 1.4% of transactions by value in August, from 13% in the preceding seven weeks.

    Prior to the new real estate tax home prices were almost double the national average of C$473,105; however we expect a sharp corretion in the coming weeks – as we pointed out at the beginning of September, the average price of detached Vancouver properties promptly crashed following the news tax, dropping 17% on the month, and 0.6% on the year, to C$1.47 million ($1.13 million) in August, wiping away one year of gains in a few weeks.

    As Bloomberg notes, the plunge in foreign participation joins other signs of a slowdown in Canada’s most expensive property market. 

    The silver lining is that while transactions may have ground to a halt, the government did pick up some extra tax revenues: British Columbia has raised C$2.5 million in revenue from the new levy since it took effect. Budget forecasts released last week indicated that the Pacific coast province expects foreign investors to scoop up about C$4.5 billion of real estate through March 2019.

    That may prove optimistic, because as reported two weeks ago as Chinese buyers wave goodbye to Vancouver, they have set their sights on another Canadian city: Toronto.

    According to the Star, sales of $1-million-plus Toronto-area single-family homes rose 83% year over year in July and August. That’s 3,026 homes, with 55 per cent of them inside Toronto’s borders.  That’s not entirely surprising given that the average cost of a detached home in Toronto was about $1.2 million, said Sotheby’s CEO Brad Henderson.

    “While $1 million is still a considerable amount of money, it’s difficult to find a single-family home in the city of Toronto for less than $1 million and it is not uncommon to find homes in the $2-million, $3-million or even $4-million-plus range,” he said.

    Sotheby’s says sales of homes in the $4-million-and-up category rose 74 per cent in the region and 58 per cent in the city in July and August. Sotheby’s said it expects Toronto’s luxury market to take the lead among Canada’s cities, outpacing Montreal, which probably will become a target for investors from Europe, China and the Middle East.

    “What the (Vancouver) tax introduced is . . . some uncertainty as to what other policy issues the city or the province may introduce, which would adversely affect investors,” Henderson said, adding that  investors are looking elsewhere, including cities outside Canada.

    “But, if they are looking in Canada, we believe Toronto will be the most logical place for people to consider. Montreal and Calgary will probably also get a look-see,” Henderson said.

    Or maybe not.

    As CBC reported earlier this week, economist Benjamin Tal of CIBC said that Ontario will have little choice but to copy Vancouver and implement a tax on foreign house buyers.  In a recent note to clients, the economist said the biggest problem facing policymakers with regard to hot housing markets in Toronto and Vancouver is a limit on the supply of new homes.

    “The main reason behind higher prices in the [Greater Toronto Area] is a policy-driven lack of land supply,” Tal said. “And with no change on that front, policymakers have to use demand tools to deal with what is essentially a supply problem.”

    Tal doesn’t speculate how much of a tax could be under consideration for Toronto, nor does he have any insight as to when and how it might be implemented.

    A foreign buyer tax is not the only possible response to the problem of high house prices. Among other possibilities, Tal cites:

    • Compelling banks to tighten their lending practices by making them pay for their own mortgage insurance.
    • Raising the down payment minimum to 10 per cent, even for homes under $1 million,
    • Closer monitoring of lending to subprime buyers.
    • Offering tax incentives to developers to make more purpose-built rental buildings, including more flexible rent control rules, as ways of cooling Toronto’s housing market.

    Tal says Toronto’s housing market has been inflated by cheap lending to people who would have no business getting a mortgage if rates returned to more typical levels.

    Of course, if Toronto does what Vancouver did and tries to spook away foreign buyers, the housing bubble will simply keep jumping city to city, first in Canada, then in move to the US, and back over to Europe, until soon the entire world makes it clear that China’s $30 some trillion in deposits that are just itching to be parked offshore are no longer welcome, forcing the Chinese government to finally deal with the alarming consequences of its own unprecedented monetary injections, which now amount to some $4 trillion in new money creation mostly by way of bank “loans” (and thus deposits) every single year.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 24th September 2016

  • Most Dangerous Person On The Planet Today: Hillary Clinton

    Submitted by Michael Shedlock via MishTalk.com,

    On Monday, Hillary Clinton accused Donald Trump of giving “aid and comfort” to Islamic terrorists, and that terrorists use his rhetoric to recruit fighters.

    On fighting terrorism, she chastised Trump “I Know How to Do This“.

    I’m the only candidate in this race who’s been part of the hard decisions to take terrorists off the battlefield. I have sat at that table in the Situation Room,” said Clinton.

    Here’s my counterclaim: Hillary Clinton not only sponsors terrorism, she is a terrorist.

    I sent this as an Op-Ed to the New York Times. Rejected as expected.

    Irony of the Year

    The irony of the day, week, month and year is Hillary’s statement “I Know How to Do This“.

    • Hillary supported Bush’s inane war in Iraq.
    • Hillary supported Bush’s inane war in Afghanistan.
    • Hillary was the mastermind of US failed strategy in Libya.
    • Hillary is the single person most responsible for Benghazi.
    • Hillary supports president Obama’s drone policy.
    • There has never been a war Hillary did not support.

    The most surefire way to make a terrorist out of a non-terrorist is to kill an innocent child or bomb an innocent person’s home. Doing so is sure to radicalize friends and family.

    String of US Terrorism

    There is nothing more un-American or unconstitutional than bombing other countries indiscriminately with no declaration of war, and with little or no regard to the lives of innocent victims.

    Hillary Clinton supported those policies as Secretary of State. Hillary Clinton, like George Bush, like Dick Cheney, and like president Obama are all guilty of terrorism.

    If you disagree, please put yourself in the shoes of a mother whose 4-year old daughter was “accidentally” killed by a US drone. Envision your neighbor’s house “accidentally” blown to smithereens by drones.

    Is it not terrorism because it’s an accident? What practical difference does it make?

    In the eyes of the families of innocent victims, no words better describe such actions than “US terrorism“. I guarantee that is precisely how you would feel if it was your son or daughter killed, or it was your house blown up.

    On April 23, 2015 the New York Times reported Drone Strikes Reveal Uncomfortable Truth: U.S. Is Often Unsure About Who Will Die.

    “Mr. Obama and his top aides have repeatedly promised greater openness about the drone program but have never really delivered on it,” said the Times, quoting Rachel Stohl, of the Stimson Center, a Washington research institute.

    On October 20, 2015, the Huffington Post reported Nearly 90 Percent Of People Killed In Recent Drone Strikes Were Not The Target.

    “U.S. drone strikes have killed scores of civilians in Afghanistan, Pakistan, Yemen and Somalia,” said the article, emphasis mine.

    US Policy Radicalizes Terrorists

    How many terrorists did the US radicalize in the process?

    How many innocent civilians died? How much compensation did the US pay? Sorry, that’s classified information.

    Given US drone policy, it’s a wonder there has not been more terrorists incidents in the US. One surefire way to have more incidents in the US is to accept Obama’s plan to take in 65,000 Syrian refugees.

    Hillary Promises More of the Same

    Hillary’s refugee policies would ensure we would have more terrorist attacks in the US.

    Globally, her statements prove she will continue the disastrous, counterproductive, and illegal policies of the Bush and Obama administration.

    Logically speaking, Hillary Clinton is the biggest threat to world peace and the most dangerous person on the planet.

    That’s what I will take with me to the election booth on November 8. What about you?

  • It's Official: America Is Not The Greatest Country On Earth… It's 28th!

    Violence, alcoholism, and obesity pose the biggest risks in the U.S.

    But the rest of the world isn’t doing much better.

    As Bloomberg reports, Iceland and Sweden share the top slot with Singapore as world leaders when it comes to health goals set by the United Nations, according to a report published in the Lancet. Using the UN’s sustainable development goals as guideposts, which measure the obvious (poverty, clean water, education) and less obvious (societal inequality, industry innovation), more than 1,870 researchers in 124 countries compiled data on 33 different indicators of progress toward the UN goals related to health.

    The massive study emerged from a decadelong collaboration focused on the worldwide distribution of disease.

    About a year and a half ago, the researchers involved decided their data might help measure progress on what may be the single most ambitious undertaking humans have ever committed themselves to: survival. In doing so, they came up with some disturbing findings, including that the country with the biggest economy (not to mention, if we’re talking about health, multibillion-dollar health-food and fitness industries) ranks No. 28 overall, between Japan and Estonia.

     

    Bloomberg notes that the U.S. scores its highest marks in water, sanitation, and child development. That’s the upside. Unsurprisingly, interpersonal violence (think gun crime) takes a heavy toll on America’s overall ranking. Response to natural disasters, HIV, suicide, obesity, and alcohol abuse all require attention in the U.S. Also noteworthy are basic public health metrics that America. doesn’t perform as well on as other developed countries. The U.S. is No. 64 in the rate of mothers dying for every 100,000 births, and No. 40 when it comes to the rate children under age five die.

    “The U.S. isn’t doing as well as it perhaps should compared with some countries in Western Europe,” Murray said.

    Finally, it's an oldie, but a goodie…

  • Caught On Tape: Did The US Target Syrian Aid Convoy With Hellfire Missile?

    Via Signs Of The Times blog,

    Hellfire Signature?

    Footage of the nighttime attack on the Syrian aid convoy in Aleppo has surfaced. But there's something curious about how the footage has been appearing on Western news reports. A commenter on the Moon of Alabama blog, PavewayIV, made the following observations about what appears in the video, and what it suggests. First, however, here's an unedited version of the blast, courtesy of ABC:

     

    In the screen cap above, you can see what looks to be a cloud of sparks following an initial explosion. According to PavewayIV, this is a signature of the Metal-Augmented Charge (MAC) Hellfire AGM-114N, the Predator drone's typical payload.

    The fiery cloud is produced by the residue of the fine-mesh fluorinated aluminum particles (the "metal augmentation"). Aside from the ABC footage, most other networks have shown edited versions that make this signature difficult to detect.

    For example, here's AP's version:

    '

     

    Shakey-cam added for jihadi-vision effect? Why would they do this?

    Thermobaric Hellfire air-blasts don't leave craters, and they typically start fires. No craters are visible in footage of the burned convoy.

    The Russians have thermobaric bombs, too, according to PavewayIV, but they use different particles and their blast patterns are different: either no "sparkles" or long-duration "sparkles", not the fast-duration flash as seen in the video of the Aleppo blast.

    As we reported yesterday, the Russians detected a Predator drone which took off from Incirlik airbase in Syria, flew to the precise location of the convoy, arrived before the strike, stayed for a while, then left after the damage was done.

    Surely just a coincidence…

  • The Black-White Wage Gap Continued To Expand Under Obama

    According to a new report from the Economic Policy Institute, the wage gap between white and black Americans was 18.1%in 1979. Astonishingly, as Statista’s Niall McCarthy reports, it has continued to expand ever since. By 2015, whites earned an average hourly real wage of $25.22 compared to $18.49 for blacks, making for a 26.7% wage gap.

    Infographic: The Black-White Wage Gap Has Continued To Expand | Statista
    You will find more statistics at Statista

    EPI cited discrimination and growing earnings inequality in general as the primary reasons for America’s huge racial pay gap. Which is odd considering that after 8 years of a black president things got worse faster… with the biggest jump (2.8 percentage points) in 36 years.

    Chart: Bloomberg

  • Why Europe Secretly Roots For Donald Trump

    Submitted by Matthew Karnitschnig via Strategic-Culture.org,

    Careful observers of European politics might be forgiven for asking if — behind the exclamation of shock and horror over the prospect of a Donald Trump presidency — they don’t detect the occasional wry smile or hint of giddiness when the conversation turns to the U.S. Republican presidential candidate.

    To be sure, hardly a day goes by without some senior European official voicing grave concerns over the possibility that Trump might win the elections. European Parliament President Martin Schulz warned recently that Trump “would be a problem not just for the EU but for the whole world.”

    And yet, in some quarters at least, the Trump cloud carries with it at least a sliver of silver lining. No European politician will say so publicly, but to some on the Continent, Trump presents a once-in-a-generation opportunity for emancipation from American influence.

    To varying degrees, America-bashing has been a mainstay on both the Right and Left of European politics for decades. From GMOs to Guantanamo, from the drone war to the death penalty, European politicians have rarely had difficulty finding reasons to rail against the U.S.

    In fact, the evils of U.S. influence is one of the few things that European politicians from nearly every slice of the political spectrum can agree upon. In Germany, for example, one is just as likely to see an “Ami Go Home” (Ami is German slang for American) poster at a rally for the Left party as at a gathering of the far-right Alternative for Germany.

    Just as the EU served as a convenient whipping post for British politicians of all stripes in recent decades, culminating in the Brexit vote, the U.S. serves a similar purpose for many European politicians. Even those who profess a deep commitment to the transatlantic relationship often can’t resist using the U.S. as a rhetorical foil to deflect attention from their own vulnerabilities.

    As long as moderate politicians occupy the White House, anti-American politicians will find it difficult to turn their rhetoric into reality. A Trump presidency would force a rethink.

    Just last week, Jean-Claude Juncker, hailing the Commission’s crackdown on Apple’s Irish tax penalty in his State of the Union speech, declared: “Europe is not the Wild West.” Anyone listening knew that “Wild West” means America. “We are not the United States of Europe,” Juncker added, to applause from the assembled MEPs. “We are much more diverse in Europe and stronger.”

    Most Europeans at the center of Europe’s political spectrum genuinely fear the consequences of a Trump victory and a weakening of the Transatlantic relationship. But others smell an opportunity too good to be allowed to pass.

    As long as moderate politicians like President Barack Obama or U.S. Democratic candidate Hillary Clinton occupy the White House, anti-American politicians will find it difficult to turn their rhetoric into reality. A Trump presidency would force a rethink.

    Here are five reasons some European politicians are secretly rooting for Trump:

    The end of free trade: From the outset, European trade negotiators warned that anti-Americanism posed the biggest threat to a sweeping transatlantic trade deal. The Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership (TTIP), the free-trade pact being negotiated by the U.S. and Europe, has been on life support for months. A Trump victory wouldn’t just douse any remaining hope for success, it would put a stake through the heart of the negotiations.

     

    Opponents of the deal see it as the Trojan Horse of trade, designed to give U.S. companies even more influence in Europe. Trump has argued the opposite, that free-trade deals hurt American workers. The bottom line: a Trump victory would put a free-trade pact between the U.S. and Europe of any kind firmly off the table.

     

    The birth of an EU army: The U.S. has guaranteed Europe’s security for decades through NATO, effectively placing a giant security umbrella over most of the Continent. That reliance doesn’t sit well with everyone.

     

    Though Europe doesn’t have anywhere near the military resources of the U.S. (American military spending accounts for about 75 percent of the NATO total), politicians in France and Germany are eager to get to work on a European defense force. The idea isn’t new and faces myriad hurdles, mainly the question of how to finance it on Europe’s shoestring budget.

     

    Nevertheless, a Trump victory would give the initiative a major boost. As with the trade deal, Trump would likely be happy to let the Europeans fend for themselves. He has made no secret of his distaste for Europe’s reliance on the U.S. military. Conversely, few Europeans would welcome Trump as commander-in-chief. If he wins, proponents of a European army would finally have the compelling argument they’ve been looking for.

     

    Breaking up big brother surveillance: Europe’s most emotional gripe about American influence in recent years has revolved around mass surveillance. Edward Snowden’s revelations have convinced Europe that nobody — be it Angela Merkel or the man on the street — is safe from the NSA’s digital dragnet.

     

    Though the reality is somewhat less dramatic, that narrative has carried the day and many Europeans are convinced the U.S. is listening to their phone calls. Snowden, a man Trump argues should be executed, has become a modern-day Che Guevara for Europe’s youth. For all the transatlantic tensions around mass surveillance, Europe still cooperates with the U.S., mainly to get access to intelligence on Islamic terrorists. A Trump victory would be welcome news to those opposed to such cooperation.

     

    Cracking down on Wall Street: The influence of Wall Street banks in Europe has long been a bee in the bonnet of Europe’s anti-American elites and populists alike. No conspiracy theory about the eurozone debt crisis, for example, is complete without dark hints about suspected machinations in New York’s financial district.

     

    The recent brouhaha about former Commission president José Manuel Barroso joining Goldman Sachs illustrates the depth of the distrust. “Goldman Sachs was one of the organizations that contributed to the financial crisis in 2007-2009, so we wonder about this particular bank,” Juncker last week, explaining why he called for an investigation into Barroso’s move. Never mind that the EU has no specific ban on officials working for Goldman or that plenty of European banks, such as Deutsche Bank, also had a hand in the turmoil.

     

    Justified or not, the bottom line is that Wall Street is considered a toxic force in Europe. Politicians on the Left have had Wall Street banks in their sights for some time. A Trump win would present a good opportunity for a crackdown.

     

    Schadenfreude: The most powerful force driving Europe’s secret hopes for a Trump victory is simple schadenfreude. Most Europeans never bought the U.S.’s “city on a hill” claims of exceptionalism. And yet for decades, they’ve been subjected to American claims of moral superiority.

    Not only did the U.S. liberate Europe from fascism, it also freed the Continent from the clutches of communism, goes a common refrain. To more than a few Europeans, President Trump would prove that the U.S. is really no different than the Continent: just as dysfunctional, just as vulnerable to its basest instincts and just as susceptible to the false promises of a demagogue.

  • New DHS Emails Reveal Efforts To Rush Citizenship Grants "Due To Election"

    Just a couple of days ago we noted that the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) had “mistakenly” granted citizenship to over 850 immigrants from “countries of concern to national security” even after they had been flagged for deportation by U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) (see “DHS Admits “Mistakenly” Granting Citizenship To 858 Immigrants From ‘Countries Of Concern To National Security’“).  Now, newly disclosed DHS emails, indicating a rush to “process as many [citizenship] cases as possible due to the election year,” may help explain why so many “mistakes” were made. 

    A recent letter from Senator Chuck Grassley (R – Iowa) to the DHS, expressed concerns over the newly revealed emails and whether there may be efforts within U.S. Customs and Immigration Services (USCIS) to naturalize as many potential voters as possible before election day.  Per Grassley’s letter (which can read in it’s entirely below), someone in the Houston USCIS field office sent the following email to office staff asking employees to consider working overtime in order to process as many naturalization applications as possible before the election: 

    “The Field Office due to the election year needs to process as many of their N-400 cases as possible between now and FY 2016.”

     

    “If you have cases in this category or other pending, you are encouraged to take advantage of the OT if you can.  This will be an opportunity to move your pending naturalization cases. If you have not volunteered for OT, please consider and let me know if you are interested.”

    Another person within the Houston field office forwarded the message saying “it’s the end of the year crunch time!”

    I couldn’t have said it better!  It’s the end of the year crunch time, so let’s get crunchy! Go Team Houston! Thanks for all your hard work!”

    Grassley’s letter to Jeh Johnson of the DHS, blasts efforts to hastily grant citizenship as “an attempt to create as many new citizen voters as possible.

    “We write to express serious concern about an apparent push by your department to rush the adjudication of naturalization applications before the upcoming presidential election, presumably in an attempt to create aa many new citizen voters as possible.

    Grassley also points out that this is not the first time efforts have been taken to rush the approval of citizenship applications for election purposes.  Apparently similar efforts were made ahead of the 1996 election when citizenship grants soared by nearly 4x.

    “Unfortunately, we have been down this road before.  In the year preceding the 1996 presidential election the Immigration and Naturalization Service (INS), the predecessor agency for USCIS, established the notorious “Citizenship USA” (CUSA) initiative.  Previously, the INS had been granting citizenship to 300,000 to 400,000 aliens per year, but under CUSA that increased to 1.1 million cases.  The apparent push to naturalize as many aliens as possible in time for them to vote in the election resulted in cut corners that endangered national security and public safety.”

    Any other election year this news might be shocking but this year, for some reason, we’re not terribly surprised.

    Watch the latest video at video.foxnews.com

     

    Senator Chuck Grassley’s letter to the Department of Homeland Security

  • State Street: "Move Over Zero Hedge, There Is A New Bear In Town"

    By Mr. Risk – State Street Global Markets

    Unleash Volatility Beast

    Thanks for nothing, central banks!

    1. If central banks provided the prototypical inflection point, risk assets should get destroyed next week.
    2. Feast your eyes on a compendium of volatility charts. The beast wants out.
    3. Keys to watch: DXY, EURAUD, and 10-year yields. Move over ZEROHEDGE. There is a new BEAR in town,

    * * *

    Ahead of the BOJ and Fed meetings, volumes slowed to a trickle, traders got back to flat, and algos reached for the offswitch. Now that event risk is in the rear view mirror, it is time to vote. Buy-the-dip or ‘‘sell everything?’’ If classic market reflexes are in play, a market meltdown following the passing of event risks is by far the more likely outcome. That US equities launched higher is nothing, because it  always does that on Fed day. The obligatory central bank forensic is a good place to begin.

    Expectations as measured by overnight volatility ahead of the BOJ were the third highest in 3-years. Notably, 7 out of the 10 highest readings have occurred in 2016, which says something about the growing perception about policy failure. Expanding monetary base has not delivered higher inflation expectations or a weaker currency. Just about every 2016 meeting USDJPY sunk like the proverbial stone.

    The ‘‘monetary assessment’’ conducted by the BOJ was an admission that QQE was unsustainable, and needed to be tweaked. Plan B is ‘‘QQE with yield curve control.’’ No, that is not a new shampoo. Here is the stripped down ghetto-economist version.

    1. Negative interest rate
    2. Stabilize 10-year yields at 0%
    3. Keep asset purchases at ¥80 tn/year
    4. Abandon monetary base target
    5. Aim to overshoot the 2.0% inflation target
    6. Rebalance ETF by buying less Nikkei 225 linked ETFs and more Topix, removing a well-flagged distortion.

    On the day, Topix banks were big winners (6.97%) versus Topix (2.7%). Not going negative and signalling a steeper curve was reasons to celebrate. As for yen it was rinse, repeat. Ostensibly ease, watch the currency weaken for a nanosecond before a violent reversal. Collectively, it was along the lines of ‘‘hey, its BOJ day, aren’t we supposed to sell USDJPY? What the heck is it doing above 102? Sell it.’’ As for the boldness of the policy these are Mr Risk’s conclusions:

    1. Policymakers have not lost their appetite for untested monetary experimentation.
    2. Pure Krugman — credibly promise to be irresponsible.’’
    3. It’s radical. The question is how credible.
    4. On the flipside: BOJ opens the door to ‘‘stealth tightening’’, as one commentator worries.

    Inviting an inflation overshoot when not a single economist believes that the BOJ will achieve its 2.0% inflation target in FY 2017 sounds like a sick joke, but really it is a radical. Even more radical is the commitment to hold JGB 10-year yields at zero. If inflation is rising as the economy heats up, they are pledging to cap nominal 10-year yields and thus keep lowering real rates, adding juice to the inflation trend. Alternatively, what happens if the global factor driving all global bond yields goes even lower? Then BOJ has committed to selling JGBs, thereby tapering and draining liquidity. This could get interesting.

    In the Q&A, Kuroda talked about the unwanted negative impacts on credit creation from yield curve flattening. It hurts banks NIM and threatens pension funds ability to deliver on promises. The BOJ wants to steepen the curve, but not by increasing longer yields because that is a monetary tightening. By deduction the market factors in a lower deposit rate going forward. FX traders don’t like it, but bank stocks might. Perhaps that links the two different outcomes.

    Confused? Tim Graf says the BOJ embraces uncertainty. That nails the zeitgeist. The world just got a little crazier and a little more dangerous. Central banks need to learn that when you are in a hole, stop digging.

    Mr Risk’s takeaway is in line with Greg Ip’s who said ‘‘central banks have shown the will to hit their growth and inflation targets but do they have the way?’’ Read his article. Central bank tools are losing their edge. The BOJ gets full marks for monetary experimentation, but investors are increasingly set to question why previous innovations have fallen short. This marks the most worrying thing possible, namely, the popping of the central bank bubble.

    YELLEN: NOTHING TO SEE HERE

    The headline is ‘‘open warfare’’ at the Fed with three Fed Presidents voting for a hike, the first time that three members have dissented in favour of tighter policy since September 2011 under previous Chairman Bernanke, before that it was 1990. Lee Ferridge pens the analysis with a cheeky title: We will hike in December; honest we will. In the most simplistic terms it appears as if the Brainard stock went up. Let the labour market run hot carried the day.

    Forget the ‘‘dots.’’ Put no stock in the idea that the Fed makes the case for a year-end hike, as argued by Hilsenrath. Uncertainty ahead of the election is the real reason the Fed stood pat, fearing what might happen to financial markets and economic data if ‘‘the Donald’’ wins.

    In the medium term, the issue with the ‘‘dots’’ boils down to a credibility problem. Michael Metcalfe writes that the ‘‘FOMC is caught in a potentially vicious circle. The market has had a run where it appears to be a better forecaster of the policy rate than the FOMC. This limits the ability of FOMC to guide market expectations because the market believes it knows better. If policy makers are then unwilling to surprise the market, as they have been historically, this reinforces the market’s better run at forecasting the policy rate and makes it even harder for the policy makers to guide expectations.’’

    Now something interesting that many may not know. While a dissent from Fed Presidents happens quite a lot, only three times have Fed Governors dissented. Even more interesting is the power to change rates rests with the 5 Governors — Yellen, Fischer, Tarullo, Powell and Brainard. That is not a typo. Yes just these five. The Financial Services Regulatory Relief Act of 2006 amended the 1913 Federal Reserve Act to give the Fed the authority to pay interest on reserves beginning Oct 1, 2011. Did you know that it is only these 5 Fed Governors who have the power to set the rate of interest of excess reserves? Now that is interesting right?

    After a press conference with plenty of the usual waffle, financial markets do what they always do on Fed day; they rallied. So far it’s carrying on today, giving the buy-the-dip crowd something to crow about.

    TECHNICAL DOLLAR

    DXY is setting up for a monster move. It can go either way, but there is an excellent chance this launches higher. It’s not like the Fed can do anything more on the policy front to crush it. Moreover, the a-b-c-d-e triangle may resolve higher in an explosion of volatility. Mr Risk is in wait mode. Let market forces tell us which way it breaks.

    BULL LOGIC

    While trolling Twitter, Mr Risk came across the following from Anil@anilvohra69. You just have to laugh at fitting the facts to the story or is it the story to the facts, Mr Risk forgets.

    Yields

    • High yields signal stronger growth
    • Low yields make stocks more attractive via a lower-discount rate.
    • Either way, buy stocks

    Volatility

    • Low volatility is good — it reflects confidence
    • High volatility is good — as it declines stocks rally
    • Either way, buy stocks

    Oil

    • Low oil is a tax cut for consumers
    • Higher oil boosts investment
    • Either way, buy stocks

    DISTURBING FUN FACTS

    • Factset reports S&P500 quarterly buybacks declined 6.8% y-o-y% in Q2 to $125 billion. This is uber-positive for volatility as buybacks are one of the key variables suppressing it.
    • The last day of summer (21 Sept, or if a weekend, the previous trading day) has only 4 previous times since 1994 been an up day. Yesterday made it 5.
    • The week after September options expiration has only been higher 4 times in the last 26 years or (15% of the time). It is down 1.1% on average. That does not bode well for Friday.
    • What does 2016 have in common with 1986, 1990, 2001, and 2008? Bloomberg story says: falling profit margins, LMCI negative 12-month change, Capex negative, and Speculative grade defaults above 5.5%. Only 1986 escaped recession, but remember that energy consumption share was larger and we did not have shale production.
    • The $400bn risk parity is in the crosshairs. It is estimated that there could be ‘‘$50bn of bond selling from risk parity type investors.’’ Read this: is the latest risk-parity blow up just starting and is a VaR shock just starting: here is the checklist. Honestly, this is one of the hottest topics right now.

    UNLEASH THE VOLATILITY BEAST

    If central bank bubble is popping then all of these following charts might actually mean something. If not, they are just a bunch of charts that look incredible but mean nothing. Let the reader decide.

    Let’s begin with the 1-year average of the VIX which catches the long cycle. It shows the two phases. Below 16, is benign, above 16 is disturbing. It has popped above the threshold and if history repeats is in the beginning of the high volatility phase which can last for the next year.

    The 3-month change in S&P 12-month forward earnings peaked in July (2.76%), turning down in August (2.20%). ISM points to a further decline. This is pointing to a higher VIX reading.

    Profit margins have declined 8 quarters on the trot. Consequently, the corporate financing gap has turned south which means increased dependence on external sources of liquidity, aka, debt. In the past such moves in the financing gap signal a downturn as well as boost the VIX.

    What is absolutely critical for unleashing volatility is a US or global recession. Expansions are not supposed to die of old age, but nonetheless the current expansion is the 4th longest based on NBER dating. There is a plethora of economic and financial series pointing towards recession. A full piece on that is on the ‘‘to-do’’ list.

    The yield curve slope adjusted for the level of yields warns of recession. Keen followers of demographics like Mr Risk’s pal Michael Green (Ice Farm Advisors) argue that the incentives are set to disappear to work past 70.5 years from a Social Security benefits standpoint. This is critical. The baby boom began in 1946. Do the math. Add 70.5 to 1946 and you get 2016.5. What do retirees not do? They don’t work. They don’t spend. Still not convinced? Consider the Social Security Act was passed August 14, 1935. While not the primary reason for the 1937-38 recession, payroll taxes were first collected in 1937. These things matter.

    The flattening yield curve slope (3m-10y) is another useful indicator when advanced 2-years against the VIX.

    The Fed’s Senior Loan Survey percent of banks tightening lending standards points to the beginnings of a credit crunch. Wait, are you saying that we should worried about not just energy loans, but car loans and commercial property loans? Oh, this is starting to get interesting.

    If that chart did not get the visceral juices flowing, wait for this next one. C&I delinquency rates deviation from its 12- month average not only is ripping higher but in fact hit the worst readings of all time. When will the VIX wake up?

    Markets are interconnected. Positive SPY/TLT says there is little diversification value, which adds to pressure to deleverage positions.

    SEXY SEPTEMBER SEASONAL

    2016 Dow price action is tracking the 1900-2012 Presidential-cycle September returns like a glove. Note that the real serious waterfall style declines are historically next week, which by the way coincides with the Trump-Clinton first debate. Also note that the incredible fit to the historical trend so far this month.

    USDJPY — GET A GRIP

    Normally, we expect USDJPY to behave in line with US 10-year yields, the Nikkei and volatility. For one of the longest stretches in a while, this currency pair has misbehaved. Mr Risk is sending it to its room with no dinner, no Facebook, and taking away its stash of Cohibas. More seriously, this persistence dislocation speaks to positioning, top side export sellers, and ultimately a lack of faith in the BOJ to deliver  a weaker currency. Hope springs eternal for this USDJPY bull!

  • "FBI Is Handing Out Deals Like Candy" – Cheryl Mills And 2 Other Clinton Aides Get Immunity

    We’re beginning to think the entire FBI investigation into Hillary’s private email servers was just a ruse to grant immunity to her entire staff.  According to the AP, the House Oversight Committee has just learned that Hillary’s top aide, Cheryl Mills, was also granted immunity along with John Bentel (Director of the State Department’s Office of Information Resources Management) and Heather Samuelson (Clinton aide). 

    For those of you keeping count, we are now aware of a total of 5 immunity deals offered to people directly involved in the Hillary email scandal:

    Cheryl Mills – Clinton’s top aide

    Heather Samuelson – Clinton aide

    John Bentel – Director of the State Department’s Office of Information Resources Management

    Bryan Pagliano – Clinton technology aide

    Paul Combetta – Platte River Networks

    The Chair of the House Oversight Committee, Jason Chaffetz (R-Utah), expressed his complete disbelief over the number of immunity deals granted in this investigation.  Per The Hill, Chaffetz said that he has “lost confidence in this investigation” noting that “immunity deals should not be a requirement for cooperating with the FBI.”

    “This is beyond explanation. The FBI was handing out immunity agreements like candy,” House Oversight Committee Chairman Jason Chaffetz (R-Utah) said in a statement.

     

    “I’ve lost confidence in this investigation and I question the genuine effort in which it was carried out. Immunity deals should not be a requirement for cooperating with the FBI.”

    The latest immunity discoveries were first revealed by the AP in the following tweet:

     

    For those of you who “do not recall” the specific involvement of Cheryl Mills and Heather Samuelson in the Hillary email scandal, here is brief recap.

    Shortly after providing the initial set of Hillary’s emails to the State Department, in “December 2014 or January 2015,” both Heather Samuelson and Cheryl Mills requested that all emails be removed from their computers using “a program called BleachBit to delete the e-mail-related files so they could not be recovered.” 

    Per the excerpt below from the FBI’s investigation notes, Mills was also the Clinton aide who instructed Paul Combetta (the “Oh Shit” guy) to “modify [Hillary’s] e-mail retention policy” to 60 days…in other words get rid of everything. 

    Hillary FBI BleachBit

     

    Can the FBI just save us all some time and admit that literally everyone interviewed in this case received an immunity deal from the DOJ?

  • How Trump Wins The Debate

    Having earlier heard president Obama's advice for how Hillary Clinton can win the debates, Patrick Buchanan offers his advice to Donald Trump

    On one of my first trips to New Hampshire in 1991, to challenge President George H. W. Bush, I ran into Sen. Eugene McCarthy.

    He was returning to the scene of his ’68 triumph, when he had inflicted the first crippling wound on Lyndon Johnson.

    “Pat, you don’t have to win up here, you know,” he assured me. “All you have to do is beat the point spread.”

    “Beat the point spread” is a good description of what Donald Trump has to do in Monday night’s debate.

    With only a year in national politics, he does not have to show a mastery of foreign and domestic policy details. Rather, he has to do what John F. Kennedy did in 1960, and what Ronald Reagan did in 1980.

    He has to meet and exceed expectations, which are not terribly high. He has to convince a plurality of voters, who seem prepared to vote for him, that he’s not a terrible risk, and that he will be a president of whom they can be proud.

    He has to show the country a Trump that contradicts the caricature created by those who dominate our politics, culture and press.

    The Trump on stage at Hofstra University will have 90 minutes to show that the malicious cartoon of Donald Trump is a libelous lie.

    He can do it, for he did it at the Mexico City press conference with President Pena Nieto where he surprised his allies and stunned his adversaries.

    Recall. Kennedy and Reagan, too, came into their debates with a crucial slice of the electorate undecided but ready to vote for them if each could relieve the voters’ anxieties about his being within reach of the button to launch a nuclear war.

    Kennedy won the first debate, not because he offered more convincing arguments or more details on the issues, but because he appeared more lucid, likable and charismatic, more mature than folks had thought. And he seemed to point to a brighter, more challenging future for which the country was prepared after Ike.

    After that first debate, Americans could see JFK sitting in the Oval Office.

    Reagan won his debate with Carter because his sunny disposition and demeanor and his “There you go again!” airy dismissal of Carter’s nit-picking contradicted the malevolent media-created caricatures of the Gipper as a dangerous primitive or an amiable dunce.

    Even George W. Bush, who, according to most judges, did not win a single debate against Al Gore or John Kerry, came off as a levelheaded fellow who was more relatable than the inventor of the internet or the windsurfer of Cape Cod.

    The winner of presidential debates is not the one who compiles the most debating points. It is the one whom the audience decides they like, and can be comfortable taking a chance on.

    Trump has the same imperative and same opportunity as JFK and Reagan. For the anticipated audience, of Super Bowl size, will be there to see him, not her. He is the challenger who fills up the sports arenas with the tens and scores of thousands, not Hillary Clinton.

    If she were debating John Kasich or Jeb Bush, neither the viewing audience nor the title-fight excitement of Monday night would be there. Specifically, what does Trump need to do? He needs to show that he can be presidential. He needs to speak with confidence, but not cockiness, and to deal with Clinton’s attacks directly, but with dignity and not disrespect. And humor always helps.

    Clinton has a more difficult assignment.

    America knows she knows the issues. But two-thirds of the country does not believe her to be honest or trustworthy. As her small crowds show, she sets no one on fire. Blacks, Hispanics and millenials who invested high hopes in Barack Obama seem to have no great hopes for her. She has no bold agenda, no New Deal or New Frontier.

    “Why aren’t I 50 points ahead?” wailed Hillary Clinton this week.

    The answer is simple. America has seen enough of her and has no great desire to see any more; and she cannot change an impression hardened over 25 years — in 90 minutes.

    But the country will accept her, if the only alternative is the Trump of the mainstream media’s portrayal. Hence, the strategy of the Democratic Party for the next seven weeks is obvious:

    Trash Trump, take him down, make him intolerable, and we win.

    No matter how she performs though, Donald Trump can win the debate, for he is the one over whom the question marks hang. But he is also the one who can dissipate and destroy them with a presidential performance.

    In that sense, this debate and this election are Trump’s to win.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 23rd September 2016

  • Italy Is The EU's Weakest Link

    Authored by George Frideman via MauldinEconomics.com,

    German Chancellor Angela Merkel, French President François Hollande, and Italian Prime Minister Matteo Renzi met Aug. 22 on an Italian aircraft carrier. They said they were meeting to talk about European policy after Brexit. The real discussion was about Italy’s economy and the steps needed to revive it.

    The EU’s Integrity Is in Question

    The location of their meeting is notable. It is a more militaristic location than Europeans normally prefer. The choice is even more interesting in light of the rumors that Germany might resume the military draft.

    The US has been increasingly critical of Europe’s contribution to NATO. The EU’s GDP is larger than that of the US, but the EU’s contribution to its own defense does not reflect that fact. Europe’s limited militaries make it dependent on the US.

    Holding the meeting on the aircraft carrier was meant to show that Europe has some defense capability. But it also shows how Brexit diminishes the EU’s military power. It was a good place to have a meeting as European unity is in question, with Italy as a weak link.

    Italy’s Crisis Is Worsening

    Italy’s economy is weak. There is no growth. The banking system is in bad shape. Unemployment is high. There is substantial public unrest, and Renzi’s standing is weakening. Italy has been somewhere between recession and stagnation since 2008. After eight years, the situation shows no signs of improving.

    The Italians want to run a substantial budget deficit to stimulate the economy. The EU operates under a “stability pact.” This requires countries to keep deficits within certain limits but allows for exceptions.

    France has operated outside the boundaries of the stability pact for years. Spain and Portugal were given exceptions as well. As Merkel put it, “The stability pact has a lot of flexibility, which we have to apply in a smart way.”

    I’m not sure what “a smart way” looks like, but the issue does not apply to Italy. Renzi said, “Italy’s deficit has been at the lowest level of the last ten years.” He said that he “would go ahead with structural reforms and deficit reductions for the good of [Italy’s] children.”

    In other words, Renzi said that he would further tighten spending. Merkel called his stance “courageous.” Hollande mentioned that the UK’s decision to leave the EU at some point in the future “requires a response by EU leaders.” Merkel agreed that they need to “deliver results.”

    She was not clear on what those results would be.

    Renzi’s Motives

    Increased austerity has not worked in eight years. Accepting that Renzi is not insane, it is hard to understand why he thinks this move will work any time soon.

    Merkel conceded that these actions “won’t show results in four weeks, but it sets the parameters for a sustainable and successful Italy.” No one expects it to work in four weeks, but the question is why it should work at all.

    This means the Germans and French are going to use Brexit to explain why increased austerity is needed. It is not clear to me how Brexit leads to austerity, but Merkel seemed to be saying that. Also, Merkel made it clear that the European Commission might be willing to accommodate Renzi.

    But Renzi’s proposed strategy hardly begs for accommodation. Renzi, who was seen as a maverick in Europe, is now being more austere than required. If Merkel offers congratulations, she has gotten everything she wants.

    Part of this might be political gamesmanship. Renzi needs a victory. He could propose deep austerity and then demand concessions from the EU Commission. Once granted, he can be hailed as a tough negotiator.

    But he would be bargaining against his own budget. Politics is strange enough that he might pull it off. An alternative is that by conceding this point, he is setting up an EU concession on the banks. That is pure guesswork, as there wasn’t a hint of it in the talks.

    Nationalism in Italy Is on the Rise

    In either case, the budget will be extremely unpopular and impose several more years of austerity. It will generate an exit movement, with proponents arguing that EU-imposed austerity caused these problems in the first place. The faster they get out of the EU the better.

    For all I know, maverick Renzi lives, and he is doing this to trigger this movement. But whether or not he favors leaving the EU, there will be a movement as a result of this budget.

    The argument for staying in the EU will be that Italy can’t get better without the EU. The argument for leaving the union will be that Italy will never get better if it stays.

    In any case, the malaise that has gripped Italy for years will continue. It is important not to expect solutions in four weeks.

    The problem with European unity is that after eight years, no one expects an improvement in four weeks. The question is whether this is the permanent condition of Europe. Perhaps this is the best Italy will do for a long time.

    The scene on the aircraft carrier was designed to remind everyone that Europe has military power and to legitimize European unity in the face of Britain’s decision to leave. But it is not clear whether the Italian public will applaud or demand that the carrier be sold.

    It isn’t clear that Italy will choose to leave by any means. But it is clear that the Italian economic crisis is not on its way to clearing up.

    *  *  *

    Watch George Friedman’s Ground-breaking Documentary Crisis & Chaos: Are We Moving Toward World War III?

  • German Politicians Are Getting Nervous About Deutsche Bank

    Just a few short days after Germany’s premier financial publication Handelsblatt dared to utter the “n”-word, when it said that in the aftermath of last week’s striking $14 billion DOJ settlement proposal, “some have even raised the possibility of a government bailout of Germany’s largest bank, which would be a defining event and a symbolic blow to the image of Europe’s largest economy”, German lawmakers are finally starting to get nervous.

    According to Bloomberg, Deutsche Bank’s suddenly troubling finances, impacted by the bank’s low profitability courtesy of the ECB’s NIRP policy as well as mounting legal costs courtesy of years of legal violations, “are raising concern among German politicians.” At a closed session of Social Democratic finance lawmakers on Tuesday, Deutsche Bank’s woes came up alongside a debate over Basel financial rules. Participants discussed the U.S. fine and the financial reserves at Deutsche Bank’s disposal if it had to cover the full amount.

    While the participants in the meeting did not reach any conclusions on the likely outcome, the discussion signals that the risks facing Deutsche Bank have the attention of Germany’s political establishment. Which means it’s almost serious enough where the politicians, in the parlance of Jean-Claude Juncker, “have to lie” or in this case redirect attention, ideally abroad: the German Finance Ministry last week called on the U.S. to ensure a “fair outcome” for Deutsche Bank, citing cases against other banks where the government settled for reduced fines.

    Actually lying also works: on February 9 German Finance Minister Wolfgang Schaeuble told Bloomberg Television that he has “no concerns about Deutsche Bank.” That has probably changed.

    The solvency problems facing Germany’s biggest bank have been widely documented: it is already ranked among the worst-capitalized lenders in European stress tests before U.S. authorities demanded $14 billion as an RMBS settlement, more than twice the €5.5 billion the bank has set aside for litigation and almost 80% of the bank’s market cap. Also, as we pointed out first in 2013, and as Matteo Renzi takes every chance to remind Germany, Deutsche Bank has a gargantuan €42 trillion in gross notional derivatives on its balance sheet. Just this week, the Italian PM told Bundesbank chief Jens Weidmann not to worry so much about Italy’s massive debt load but instead to solve the problems of German banks which had “hundreds and hundreds and hundreds of billions of euros of derivatives” on their books.”

    But what may be most troubling is not what German politicians are talking about behind closed door, but what they are not talking about in public. Bloomberg notes that Merkel’s government is now maintaining a public silence on Deutsche Bank’s woes. Then again, what is there to say: if DB is indeed approaching the cliff, any discussion of the bank would only lead to more concerns about the bank’s viability. There was some discussion of DB, however, during a September 16 meeting of Germany’s Financial Stability Committee, a group of German finance officials and regulators, whose members concluded that the fine demanded by the U.S. government would probably be lowered, Handelsblatt newspaper reported. In other words, hope is once again a strategy. Sadly, when it comes to banks with multi-trillion balance sheets, this may not be the best approach.

    And just to make sure that German politicians have even more to talk about, earlier today the Brussels-based Single Resolution Board, the resolution authority for 142 banks (including Deutsche Bank) warned that EU bank may need rescue funds equaling twice their ECB capital.  As Bloomberg reported today, requiring banks to have at least that same amount as the minimum capital requirement set by the ECB in loss-absorbing liabilities will ensure that they can recapitalize themselves quickly after restructuring, SRB head Elke Koenig said.

    The European Banking Authority said in July that the region’s banks may need as much as 470 billion euros ($524 billion) in additional MREL-eligible funding under conditions similar to those cited by Koenig. The EBA sample consisted of 114 banks representing 70 percent of the EU’s banking assets, including lenders not overseen by the SRB.

    And the bulk of these funds will have to be procured by Europe’s largest bank: Deutsche Bank.

  • Who Is Behind The Riots? Charlotte Police Says 70% Of Arrested Protesters Had Out Of State IDs

    Confirming what many had suspected when viewing the sudden and intense collapse into anrchy that occurred in Charlotte this week, Todd Walther, spokesman for the Charlotte-Mecklenburg Fraternal Order of Police told CNN's Erin Burnett:

    "This is not Charlotte that's out here.  These are outside entities that are coming in and causing these problems. These are not protestors, these are criminals."

     

    "We've got the instigators that are coming in from the outside.  They were coming in on buses from out of state.  If you go back and look at some of the arrests that were made last night.  I can about say probably 70% of those had out-of-state IDs.  They're not coming from Charlotte."

     

     

     

     

    As shocking as this statement is, it should not be a total surprise. 18 months ago, as the riots flared in Ferguson, there was one man pulling the strings of this 'domestic false flag'… George Soros. In an apparent effort to  "keep the media’s attention on the city and to widen the scope of the incident to focus on interrelated causes — not just the overpolicing and racial discrimination narratives that were highlighted by the news media in August," liberal billionaire George Soros donated $33million to social justice organizations which helped turn events in Ferguson from a local protest into a national flashpoint.

    As The Washington Times explains,

    There’s a solitary man at the financial center of the Ferguson protest movement. No, it’s not victim Michael Brown or Officer Darren Wilson. It’s not even the Rev. Al Sharpton, despite his ubiquitous campaign on TV and the streets.

     

    Rather, it’s liberal billionaire George Soros, who has built a business empire that dominates across the ocean in Europe while forging a political machine powered by nonprofit foundations that impacts American politics and policy, not unlike what he did with MoveOn.org.

     

    Mr. Soros spurred the Ferguson protest movement through years of funding and mobilizing groups across the U.S., according to interviews with key players and financial records reviewed by The Washington Times.

    Still not buying it? As The New American recently reported, Ken Zimmerman, the director of U.S. programs at Soros’s Open Society Foundations (OSF), denied last year that Soros had funded BLM, saying it was just a rumor. 

    That was before hackers with DCLeaks.com published OSF documents showing that the Soros group had already given at least $650,000 directly to BLM.

     

    Those same documents reveal the reason for OSF bankrolling BLMthe “dismantling” of America so that it can be recast according to the vision of Soros and his leftist cohorts.

     

    The communist-on-its-face nature of these and other demands of the organizations under the BLM umbrella are a clear indicator of the real intent of BLM. The deep-pocketed funding by the likes of Soros, the Center for American Progress, the Ford Foundation, and Borealis Philanthropy show that BLM is the means, not the end.

     

    BLM is little more than a tool of social revolutionaries hell-bent on destroying America so they can build their long awaited dystopia which they attempt to pass off as a utopia.

    So with Hillary's poll numbers decling rapidly, and a debate looming that she would desperately like to be focused on domestic division as opposed to every email, pay-to-play, foreign policy misstep, and cough or stumble she has taken; is anyone shocked that 'out of state' protesters would turn up in Charlotte suddenly turning a peaceful but angry protest into tear-gas-filled deadly riots? And who is a big donor to Clinton?

    George Soros: $7 million

    Financier George Soros founded what would become the Quantum Fund in 1969 with $12 million. According to the Bloomberg Billionaires Index, he's now worth $24.7 billion and continues to invest through Soros Fund Management, a family firm. As a political donor, Soros has been mercurial. In 2004, he contributed $23.5 million to organizations opposing George W. Bush's reelection effort. In 2008, he donated $2,300 to both Clinton and Barack Obama, and that was it. Soros's Open Society Policy Center, the advocacy arm of his philanthropic network, spent $8.2 million on lobbying Washington in 2015. It focuses on international human rights, immigration, foreign aid, public health and criminal justice reform, among other issues. Since 2003, Soros has contributed $54 million to federal candidates and committees.

     

  • Bill Fleckenstein Slams CNBC "Jerk" – "Don't Get In My Face Because I Won't Join Your Party"

    Having been invited on to CNBC to discuss his views of the market, famous short-seller Bill Fleckenstein explained rather eloquently that QE4 is coming and people will wake up to the fact that central bankers “are the arsonists that create the fire, not the firemen that put it out.” This non-mainstream view was treated with disdain by CNBC host Tim Seymour who slammed Fleckenstein for “missing out” on the “artificial market’s” (because even CNBC now admits that’s what it is) gains. The response was epic.

    “Don’t be such a jerk… I don’t ask to come on this show, you invited me… and don’t get in my face because I won’t join your party…”

    Enjoy:

  • Dear Obama, How Does A 60% Increase In NYC Homelessness Constitute A Recovery?

    Last week, we wrote a post entitled “Harvard Crushes The “Obama Recovery” Farce With 9 Simple Charts” in which we reviewed a report from Harvard Business School on the true health of the U.S. economy.  Given the title, it’s probably not terribly surprising that Harvard was somewhat “underwhelmed” with the Obama recovery after taking a multi-decade look at various economic metrics like labor force participation rates, new business formation, productivity and real household income. 

    Now, courtesy of data from the New York City Department of Homeless Services, we have a couple of additional charts to add to the list like the one below that shows a ~60% increase in the number of NYC families living in homeless shelters over the past five years.  Aside from an increse during the “great recession”, the number of New York City families living in homeless shelter remained fairly constant at around 8,000 from July 2008 through July 2011.  That said, over the following 5 years beginning in August 2011 through today, NYC has experienced a nearly 60% increase in the number of families living in homeless shelters to nearly 13,000. 

    Ironically, the increase in homelessness experienced during the “great recession” was just a blip on the radar compared to the past five years as residential rental rates in NYC have soared.  

    NYC Homeless

     

    Alternatively, we offer up the following statistics from Mayor Bill De Blasio’s Fiscal 2016 “Mayor’s Management Report” highlighting a 42% increase in applications for “Emergency Rent Assistance” from New York City families at risk of losing their housing. 

    Rent Assistance

     

    If this is what a “recovery” looks like to Obama we would certainly like to better understand how he would define a recession.

  • Un-Becoming American – One Man's Painful Journey To Renouncing Citizenship

    Submitted by 'Kevnice' via ForeignByNature.com,

    In April 2012, I returned to Switzerland – my country of birth – to commence a new phase of my adult life.

    Naturally, one of the first steps to undertake when establishing oneself in a new country is to open a bank account.

    I went down to the local Raiffeisen bank branch in the village of Aesch, Luzern, where my relatives and ancestors had lived and worked as farmers for over 10 generations.

    At the bank I received the standard application forms required to open a basic checking account. The form asked me about my nationality. I marked Swiss as my nationality, and the United States as my second nationality.

    The clerk reviewed the forms I had submitted. After careful consideration and some internal discussion she said, “I am sorry, we cannot open a bank account for you because you are a US citizen”.

    “But I am a Swiss citizen!” I complained, in Swiss-German.

    “I know, but you have the US nationality. Earlier this month we received a directive from top management not to open any more accounts for US passport holders, even if they are also Swiss. I am really sorry, but we cannot do anything for you”, she said.

    I left the bank angry and confused.

    I checked with several other banks. It was the same story with all of them.

    I told the story to my Swiss relatives. They all had the same reaction: “But you’re Swiss!”

    Nobody could understand.

    At that time I was completely ignorant of FATCA, the global taxation of US citizens, the requirement to report foreign bank account balances over 10,000 USD to the US Treasury (FBAR), and all these compliance matters that – at least among US expats – have become hot button topics in recent years. I left the US at the age of 22 after university, never having really worked there beyond the part time student job, and had been living in Japan and Taiwan for the previous 7 years teaching English before moving to Switzerland.

    It’s not as though the US government gives you an exit interview when you leave the country, explaining to you how to comply with all of their cumbersome laws. The burden is on you – the taxpayer – to inform yourself, or face heavy penalties – up to $10,000 for each year of non-compliance.

    You’re guilty until proven innocent.

    Suddenly, I realized that I had technically been non-compliant with the US for years, although I never made much money.

    I was furious. What right did the US government have to try to tax me or make me declare anything to them, not having lived there for almost 10 years? No other developed country in the world requires this. I didn’t make enough money to actually have to pay US tax (you can exclude around $100K as foreign income), but the very principle of having to comply enraged me.

    This was when I first considered renouncing my US citizenship.

    I contacted the embassy in Bern, who quickly sent me an information package. All I had to do was back-file five years of returns (I could exclude all my earnings from US taxation), make an appointment at the US embassy in Bern, and pay a $450 administration fee. As I was already a citizen of Switzerland at birth I wouldn’t have to pay any exit tax. It only took 2-3 weeks to receive an appointment. It seemed quick and easy.

    However, I hesitated.

    What about my mother? She still lived in the US. What if she got sick or something? What if Switzerland or Europe becomes a terrible place to be in the future? What if the EU breaks up?

    I thought it might be wise to keep my US citizenship, just in case. A second nationality is like an insurance policy against economic and social decline in the country of your first nationality.

    But what to do, exactly? Should I go through the rest of my life outside of the US lying about it, maintaining that I am only Swiss?

    I had been non-compliant for years already and had never heard anything from the US authorities. Maybe I could just continue under the radar forever?

    Or should I just swallow my dignity and comply with all their rules? I only had to file a simple tax return and the FBAR form. As mentioned, I made too little money to owe tax anyway.

    How did this concern my wife? What happens when we have children, and I die – wouldn’t they have to pay US inheritance tax on everything I owned? What would be the point of keeping US citizenship if I wasn’t planning on passing it on to my children?

    I went back and forth like this in my mind for a couple of years. I couldn’t make a decision. I did not want to lie for the rest of my life, but neither did I want to comply.

    Then in September 2014 came the tipping point for me: The US State Department raised the administration fee for renunciations by 522%, from $450 to $2,350!

    I realized then that I was dealing with a criminal institution. They were the Mafia – either pay protection money your whole life, or pay one lump sum to get out.

    What was preventing them from deciding to raise the fee to $5,000, or even $10,000?

    Nothing prevents them. They could do whatever they wanted. There had been record numbers of renunciations over the past few years. It was good business. It’s not like there existed a powerful expat lobby in Washington pressuring them to change their policies on renunciation.

    Rage took hold of me again. I was also angry at myself for hesitating on my first instinct and that my hesitation would cost me $2,000.

    I let my rage stew for a few months. I researched the various forms of relinquishment, to see if I could find a way out of paying the fee (Renunciation is one type of relinquishment, and certain types of relinquishment do not require payment of the fee).

    However I wasn’t ready to pledge allegiance to al-Qaeda and none of the other situations or criteria applied to me, so I finally bit the bullet and made an appointment for renunciation.

     

    The Administrative Process Begins

    My appointment was set at the embassy in Bern for February 20, 2015.

    I had been told by the embassy beforehand that it generally took 2-3 months to process the Certificate of Loss of Nationality (CLN), the document which officially states that you are no longer a US citizen.

    A few days before my appointment, I went to a networking event where I spoke with two insurance professionals who served foreign clients. They both related stories to me of US citizens in Switzerland that had renounced their citizenship. For one client it took the government 1 year to process his CLN. The other client had renounced 18 months earlier and still hadn’t received his CLN.

    What the hell was going on?

    February 20th arrived. My appointment was at 3 pm so I took the afternoon off work and headed to Bern.

    It was an unseasonably warm and sunny day. People relaxed on benches and parks throughout the city as I walked. The sapphire blue sky was completely clear of clouds and there was no haze. You could see the awe-inspiring Alps in the distance with total clarity, the glimmering snowy tops providing a stunning backdrop to the gorgeous architecture of Bern.

    I was early for my appointment so I relaxed in one of the parks near some teenagers. I wished I could worry about music and girls and who was cool in school instead of fretting over nationality and tax compliance. I collected my thoughts.

    I went to enter the embassy about 15 minutes before my appointment. There were several US flags flying outside. I felt no emotion when I looked at them.

    The entrance was guarded by some kind of African military guy wearing a bulletproof vest who opened the door after I rang a bell.

    I had my work laptop with me. He gestured toward my laptop bag.

    “Is that a laptop? Sorry, no laptops allowed in here”, he said in accented English.

    Of course they were concerned with terrorists. I had heard that the Swiss branch of the CIA was headquartered in the same building.

    But what the hell? There was never any mention about a No Laptop Policy in the information package I had received from Bern. I thought that it could be rather common for people to have a laptop with them.

    I looked around. There was nowhere to put it.

    “Uhhh… what do I do then? Where can I put this?” I asked him.

    “Go see the lady outside by the security box”, he replied.

    I asked her and she told me in Swiss-German that there was a police station a couple of short blocks down the way where I could leave it.

    I headed down the street and looked around. I went left, then right. I did not see any police station.

    I asked a guy on the street. He didn’t know anything about a nearby police station.

    I checked the time on my mobile. I had less than 10 minutes. I didn’t want to be late for this appointment. I thought that they might cancel on me if I was a minute late – you never know with bureaucrats.

    I jogged back to the lady at the security box.

    “Sorry”, I said, “I looked around but did not see any police station. Can you indicate it again please?”

    “It’s that building with the red awning”, she told me while pointing to the end of the street.

    I went back to that building. There was something that looked like a bakery with a red awning, but it certainly wasn’t a police station.

    I checked my mobile again. 5 minutes until my appointment. I started to sweat.

    Next to the bakery there was an apartment building. I checked the entrance and it was open. I ran in there, quickly stashed my laptop bag behind some plants in a common/smoking area on the first floor, and jogged back to the entrance with 2 minutes to spare.

    Once inside the building I went through the metal detector and checked my mobile phone in with security. They directed me down some stairs to a basement level.

    As I walked into this area a female security guard greeted me.

    “Good afternoon. I need to ask you to take off your sunglasses”, she said.

    “They aren’t sunglasses”, I said. They are regular prescription glasses that tint when exposed to UV rays.

    “What do you need them for?” she asked.

    “To move through space”, I informed her.

    “Well we don’t allow sunglasses in here. So please take them off until you reach the seating area.”

    I took off my glasses and used sonar to find a seat, then put my glasses back on.

    Once I regained my vision I saw that there were 3 other renunciants waiting before me, with expressions of resignation on their faces.

    I was feeling too somber and involved in my own thoughts to make chit chat. I sat there silently.

    While I was waiting, I eavesdropped on a British-accented woman talking with one of the other renunciants. She also had brought a laptop with her and in the course of conversation confirmed that the building with the red awning was indeed a bakery. They permitted her to store her laptop there for 3 Swiss francs.

    What kind of an embassy is this? Running a cash-for-laptop-storage scam? Is this the embassy of the leader of the free world or that of a banana republic?

    I only had to wait about 5 minutes. First, you go to a window and answer a few basic questions. They give you a pay slip which you then take to another window to make the payment of the $2,350. I got to the payment window which required you to ring a bell to open. I rang the bell and waited about 2 full minutes before someone answered.

    I made the payment and they gave me a receipt. Then I took my receipt with me back to the waiting area.

    While I was waiting, I watched and heard two other people go through the entire renunciation process, which takes less than 5 minutes. So it was anti-climactic when it was finally my turn as I had just heard everything twice.

    My turn. I met with the consul, a big friendly portly man behind a bulletproof window. I had to confirm some information in writing. Then he recited the Oath of Renunciation; I didn’t even need to say it myself. When he finished, I signed a statement which includes the text of the Oath.

    I handed over my US passport which he then took and punched a few holes in, invalidating it.

    The consul then informed me that it would take 3-5 months before I would receive my CLN. It would be mailed from Washington to the embassy in Bern, and they would contact me when they received it.

    He then asked me if I had any plans to travel to the US during this time. I said No.

    He explained to me that until I receive my CLN, I would not yet be officially non-American. US immigration law however states that US citizens must enter the United States on their US passport, which the embassy had just confiscated. This meant that it was very likely that I would be barred from entry if I tried to enter the US, unless it was an emergency such as a funeral, in which case they might let me in provided that I could document as much as possible (i.e. provide a death certificate).

    I told him that was fine. I didn’t need to enter the US in the next 3-5 months.

    That concluded my renunciation. The whole thing was over in about 30 minutes. I grabbed a can of beer on the way to the train station and headed home, feeling the whole experience to be surreal.

     

    Administrative Ping Pong

    It was August 2015. Six months had gone by and I had not heard anything from Bern.

    My mother suggested that I called the embassy. Of course US consular services are only available for calls during a 2 hour window each day.

    Once I got through and identified myself, I explained that I had been told it would take 3-5 months to process my CLN and that now 6 months passed by without news.

    “Yeah”, began the counselor, “it has been taking a lot longer lately due to some IT issues. I see that your application is still open but it is somehow hung up in the system in Washington. I am afraid there is nothing we can do about this from here.”

    “OK, that’s fine, I will just wait a bit longer”.

    I waited longer. The temperature cooled down and the leaves changed color.

    Then it was October. My mom was starting to freak out a little and suggested that I call again. I explained that they had said there was nothing they could do. She insisted that I try again.

    So I called again.

    “Yeah”, began the counselor, “it has been taking a lot longer lately due to some IT issues. I see that your application is still open but it is somehow hung up in the system in Washington. I am afraid there is nothing we can do about this from here.”

    “OK, that’s fine, I will just wait a bit longer”.

    I practically gave up at this point. My mom started writing letters to her local Congressman.

    The leaves fell from the trees and were replaced with snow. Christmas and New Year’s came and went.

    Over the holidays, I had an idea. I recalled that a college buddy of mine was in the Peace Corps and had later been placed at the US Department of the Treasury. So I called in a favor. I asked him if he knew anyone in the State Department, specifically US Citizens Services.

    It turns out he did. He put me in touch with someone at State named Eric, who knew someone else that handled renunciations.

    I wrote an e-mail to the contact. She responded, saying that my case had been resolved already in April 2015 and that Bern should have my paperwork.

    Incredulous, I called Bern a few days later in early January 2016.

    “Hey Bern, Washington told me that my case had been resolved already 9 months ago and that you should have my paperwork”, I complained.

    “That is incorrect”, replied Bern. “It was with Washington until only a few days ago when it was sent back over to us”.

    “I see. Do you think that Washington just forgot to click a button or something in the system? And that it came back to you because I contacted them, and they finally moved it forward?” I asked.

    “We can’t be sure, but that sounds about right”, they replied.

    Sure enough, a week later I finally received my Certificate of Loss of Nationality.

     

    Final Thoughts

    My experience with the delays and the experiences of those others I mentioned (plus other similar experiences that I read about on various message boards) left my Spider Sense tingling. While I can never be sure, the conspiracy theorist in me wonders whether certain administrators in Washington don’t intentionally delay finalizing renunciation cases as a form of administrative punishment. They know that you are in administrative limbo and cannot visit the US during this time. Could it be a final, spiteful, parting middle finger in your face from the US government?

    That’s the kind of high level service you get for paying exorbitant government fees. You would think that with such a price tag you’d at least get quick service. In the end I needed to use government contacts and pull administrative strings to finally receive the service for which I paid so generously.

    It didn’t do much to diminish the impression I had of dealing with a banana republic, rather than the greatest superpower the world has ever known.

    • That said, I am truly grateful. I consider myself to be quite lucky.
    • I am grateful to have been a citizen at birth of one of the most prosperous, most developed, and most democratic societies in the world. Without Swiss citizenship it would have been a much more difficult decision.
    • I am grateful that I did not have any assets or much money when I renounced, which made compliance easier and virtually costless.
    • I am grateful that I was not subject to exit tax. For those subject to exit tax, upon renunciation the IRS taxes you as if you had sold all of your assets.
    • Finally, I am grateful that I do not have to vote in the 2016 US presidential election.

  • Doctor: Hillary's "Abnormal Eye Movements" Hint At Serious Health Issues

    By John R. Coppedge, MD, FACS is a general surgeon from Texas, originally posted on The Hill

    In 2014 Conan O’Brien did a spoof of Hillary Clinton‘s interview with Diane Sawyer about her lack of lingering health issues following her 2012 concussion. In an obviously photoshopped version Clinton’s eyes are made to oscillate crazily.

    It was a very funny piece. Now, it may not seem so funny.

    Hillary Clinton exhibited abnormal eye movements during her recent speech in Philadelphia and they were not photoshopped.

    Her eyes did not always move in the same direction at the same time. It appears that she has a problem with her left sixth cranial nerve. That nerve serves only one function and that is to make the lateral rectus muscle contract. That muscle turns the eye in the direction away from the midline. 

    It comes out of the base of the brain and runs along the floor of the skull, immediately beneath the brain before coursing upward to the eye. Dysfunction of that muscle causes the striking picture of the eyes not aiming in the same direction and causes the patient to suffer double vision.

    Like all things medical, there is a long list of potential causes but in my opinion the most likely one, based on Clinton’s known medical history is an intermittent lateral rectus palsy caused by damage to or pressure on her sixth cranial nerve.

    It is known that she suffered a traumatic brain injury in late 2012 when she fell and struck her head. What is also known is that she was diagnosed with a transverse sinus thrombosis — blood clot in the major vein at the base of the brain. Almost all patients with a transverse sinus thrombosis suffer swelling of the brain and increased intracranial pressure. Most have headaches, balance issues and visual disturbances — all of which Clinton was reported to have following that event.

    Clinton’s physician reported that she was placed on Coumadin (a blood thinner) to dissolve the blood clot. Actually, that is incorrect, because Coumadin has no effect on an existing clot. It serves only to decrease the chance of further clotting occurring Clinton’s physician has also reported that on follow up exam, the clot had resolved. That is surprising since the majority of such clots do not dissolve. The way it was documented that the clot had resolved has not been reported.

    If, as is statistically likely, Clinton’s transverse sinus is still blocked, she would still have increased pressure and swelling and decreased blood flow to her brain. That swelling would place pressure on the exposed portion of the sixth cranial nerve at the base of her brain, explaining the apparent lateral rectus palsy. And such a deficit can be partial and/or intermittent. 

    Additionally, when patients who have decreased intracranial blood flow becoming volume depleted (dehydrated) or have a drop in blood pressure loss of consciousness can occur. That could explain her witnessed collapse in New York City on 9/11.

    One thing that is taught early in medical school is that a patient’s history, physical exam, signs and symptoms should usually lead to a single diagnosis.

    Crudely put “when you itch, it is probably not lice and fleas but one or the other.” More professionally put, in most cases the patient’s symptoms can be explained by one unifying diagnosis, not a constellation of disparate ones. The admittedly speculative scenario I propose is an attempt to understand and rationally explain what is going on, based on known facts and the observable signs exhibited by Clinton.

    Having previously written about this, I once again suggest that she undergo an independent neurologic exam and have proper studies to determine whether or not she still has a blood clot at the base of her brain, swelling of the brain, increased intracranial pressure and whether or not her 2012 traumatic brain injury was accompanied by a skull fracture with or without bleeding around or in the brain itself and if there are any residual areas of scarring of the brain.

    Critics will rightly point out that I have not examined Clinton. They will point out that I am not ophthalmologist or a neurologist. But I am a physician and the concepts discussed above are taught to every medical student early in their education. Her traumatic brain injury, transverse sinus thrombosis, subsequent symptoms, falling, passing out and now the obvious problem with eye movement are all fact, not speculation.

    It would be very helpful if Clinton agreed to an independent exam and to have the questions raised here answered. It is too important not to get this right.

  • Retired Green Beret Warns "We Haven't Been This Close To Nuclear War In A Long Time"

    Submitted by Jeremiah Johnson (Nom de plume of a retired Green Beret of the United States Army Special Forces) via SHTFPlan.com,

    As can readily be seen by the current events, the world has not been this close to a nuclear war and World War 3 in a long time.  There are four major flashpoints right now that could easily escalate and ignite a powder keg, transforming from a regional conflict or conflicts into a world war: Syria, the South China Sea, Ukraine, and North and South Korea.  The “reconstruction” of a Cold War-type faceoff, initiated by the U.S. and NATO building up forces in Eastern Europe and facing off against Russia.

    A nuclear war will be initiated by an EMP (Electromagnetic Pulse) detonation over the continental U.S., followed by a nuclear exchange and a war with conventional forces.

    As of this writing, the U.S. has “mistakenly” bombed Syrian governmental military forces, causing at least 60 deaths with more than 100 others wounded.  The Russian government is sizzling, especially with the response by (of all people) Samantha Power, U.S. Ambassador to the UN had this to say to the media, as reported by CNN:

    “We are investigating the incident.  If we determine that we did indeed strike Syrian military personnel, that was not our intention. And we of course regret the loss of life.”

    True humanitarians, all, and especially she, the wife of Cass Sunstein and a true Marxist disciple of the Weather Underground (along with Cass) regrets the loss of life.  The airstrikes occurred just two days before the U.S. and Russia were supposed to have joint airstrikes against ISIS.  As ISIS is a creation of the U.S. State Department and the administration, it seems the U.S. decided to strike their true intended target…the Assad government forces…as it wants to topple Syria, and escalate things with the Russians.

    Meanwhile last week, the U.S. flew two B-1B nuclear bombers along the DMZ to bluster North Korea with a show of force in response to the nuclear bomb test they conducted just a week prior.  South Korea also threatened to reduce Pyongyang to ashes, while North Korea prepares for yet another nuclear test in the near future.  More than 20 missile tests have been conducted by North Korea just this year alone.  This is not counting the satellite launch at the beginning of the year in which they placed their second satellite into orbit…a path of trajectory, mind you, that takes it over the continental U.S. several times per day.

    Ukraine cease fire agreements between the populist forces (rebels) in the eastern provinces and the U.S.’s puppet Poroshenko-government has been violated innumerable times as the fighting in Donetsk continues.  In the meantime, the IMF just approved a 2-billion-dollar loan to Ukraine and the U.S. is supplying Poroshenko’s government with “nonlethal” U.S. military equipment.  Russia has been posturing a tremendous number of troops (some DOD estimates range as high as 150,000) on its western border facing Ukraine: they have conducted military exercises, including some within Crimea, which they annexed from Ukraine in 2014.

    The United States has been beefing up its presence in the Baltic States of Latvia, Lithuania, and Estonia, as well as in Poland and Moldova, the latter emplacing U.S. missile systems for “defense” that can be converted to offensive, nuclear missiles in hours.  In addition to this, the U.S. is deploying B-61 nuclear bombs to Germany’s Buchel airbase.  Russia has countered with ordering the deployment of the Iskander-M missiles to Kaliningrad, Russia’s westernmost military base in a direct standoff against the U.S. buildup in Germany and Eastern Europe.

    Meanwhile things in the South China Sea are heating up as the U.S. has moved naval assets into the area in a show of force in support of Japan over the disputed Senkaku islands face-off between Japan and China.  Last week the Russian navy linked its assets with China’s in the two countries’ joint naval exercises that could turn into a combat operation and a Chinese invasion at the drop of a hat.

    There is a slow buildup and preparation of media coverage that is trying to paint Russia in the leading role of the aggressor in all of this.  It isn’t working, except with those who are ill-informed.  The bottom line: with the U.S. election year in complete disarray and civil unrest lurking as a result of social and economic breakdowns, a war would be the perfect thing to justify suspension of the elections and the inculcation of martial law in the “interests of national security.”  The general civilian publics of all of the nations would be the ones to suffer, and it wouldn’t be the first time that it happened.  Politicians – the ones who “regret the loss of life” in a war – are not the ones to lose their own lives or the lives of their children when the balloon goes up.

  • Spot The Odd (Hedge Fund Strategy) Out

    The trend is your friend… until the end. August was a great green month for many hedge funds (with Multi-Strategy and Event-Driven strategies doing best). But, as RBC notes., ‘trend-following’ CTA/Managed Money funds “got smoked.”

    Spot the odd strategy out…

     

    As Bloomberg reports,

    Commodity trading advisers, the catch-all phrase for a breed of quantitative investors who use trends in asset prices and volatility as trading signals, posted some of the hedge fund industry’s worst losses in August — and it isn’t getting better. The group is down between 1 percent to 1.5 percent this month, according to Credit Suisse Group AG.

     

    Wrong-way bets on everything from Treasury rates to commodities have cost trend followers as market correlation whipped up before this week’s meeting of the Federal Reserve. In particular, CTAs paid a price for betting interest rates would fall in the second half of the year, Credit Suisse said.

     

     

    “The trend-following CTAs have given back the vast majority of a profitable first half of 2016 as their long equities, long rates and short crude gambit results in losses,” wrote Mark Connors, Credit Suisse’s global head of risk advisory in New York, in a note to clients Tuesday.

    It’s a reversal of fortune for the group, which by Credit Suisse’s estimate had been one of the best hedge-fund categories in the nine months through June, rising 5.4 percent. As RBC explains,

    STRATEGY PERFORMANCE UPDATE SEES SYSTEMATIC / CTA / TREND-FOLLOWING SMOKED QTD (2nd column from right) FOLLOWING THE VaR SHOCK: That said, those with shorter-term models have likely profited from the pivot back into the old ‘long fixed income / long equities / long crude / long gold / short volatility regime seen over the past few sessions, so expect these strategies turn again turn higher imminently as leverage is re-deployed.

    Given the force and speed at which they ditched equities, it’s likely CTAs contributed to the recent bout of volatility, said Credit Suisse’s Connors, particularly since equity long-short funds increased stock holdings to near-peak levels. During the stretch, the VIX spiked 40 percent in one day and the S&P 500 Index had its worst daily loss since the British vote to leave the European Union. The stage was set for a rough patch starting in June, when crude’s decline caused the trend-following managers to bet against the commodity. While that bet worked as oil dropped 14 percent in July, it burned shorts the following month when crude snapped back 7.5 percent.

    “When trends switch, they have a short-term model and can pick up on that, and they caught the move in oil in June,” said Connors by phone. “The frequency of shifts in oil are hard to trade.”

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 22nd September 2016

  • State Department Admits: Islamic State Terrorists Trying To Pose As Refugees

    Submitted by Pete Kasperowicz via Washington Examiner,

    State Department spokesman John Kirby acknowledged Wednesday that Islamic State terrorists are trying to mingle with refugee populations overseas in the hopes of making it to the U.S. posing as a refugee.

    "I wouldn't debate the fact that there's the potential for ISIS terrorists to try to insert themselves, and we see that in some of the refugee camps in Jordan and in Turkey, where they try to insert themselves into the population," Kirby said on "Fox and Friends."

     

    Still, he argued that the vetting process for these refugees is tough, and should be enough to keep terrorists out, although he admitted it's not a perfect process.

     

  • The "Deplorables" – Who We Are And What We Want

    Submitted by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    In numerous articles over the past several years I have made observations on a rule of life that I strictly adhere to: that all social conflicts can be boiled down to the reality of two opposing groups — those people who want to control the lives of others, and those people who simply want to be left alone.  You can read more about my philosophy on this in an article I published in 2014 titled 'Why Is Independence So Frightening To Some People?'

    The mainstream media and establishment institutions focused on propaganda will tell you that there are hundreds or thousands of dangerous cultural enclaves and ideologies out there that you should fear.  They will tell tales of rage and suspicion between the rich and the poor, haves and have-nots, whites and blacks, gays and straights, academics and working class, believers and atheists, Muslims and Christians, Republicans and Democrats, Eastern nations and Western nations, etc.  The establishment relies on these divisions as a rationale for the homogenization of cultures — they argue that if we erase borders, religion and sovereignty while enforcing multiculturalism and wealth redistribution, then these groups will have no reason to fight anymore and a Utopian fever orgy will be our inevitable reward.  Yes, it sounds quite magical.

    That said, I don’t hold any claims against any of these groups per se, as long as they respect my inherent and individual freedoms.  If they are determined to impose their ideology on me through force, that is another matter entirely.

    This is the only paradigm that actually matters in the end.  All other paradigms are a means for the powers that be to pit the masses against each other.  When you look at the world in this way, it is easier to let go of all the “sacred cows” and learned biases that blind us to the truth.

    I don’t affiliate with Republicans, but I am happy to support a Republican that proves he or she has no interest in dictating my principles or my future.  Same with a Democrat. Same with any black or white or brown person. Same with any gay or straight person.  I really don’t care; stay out of my way and I’ll stay out of yours. Get in my way, however, and I will step on you.  If you’re bigger than me, I’ll dislocate your kneecaps and then step on you.  There is no despot so big that they are immune to the heel of a strategically placed boot.

    This, I would say, is a defining principle behind those of us who make up the so-called “alt-right;” the people Hillary Clinton recently referred to as “the deplorables.” When describing this subculture of “miscreants” I often use the title of the “liberty movement.” We are defined and unified by our desire for a society based on the integral love of freedom and a fervent opposition to collectivism and totalitarianism.  For this, we are called “deplorable.”  But let’s extrapolate on that a little…

    In our era, certain organizations have adopted a hard-line love affair with collectivism, and most of these groups today are allied with the far Left (socialist) side of the political spectrum.  This includes “neo-conservatives” who have never been conservative and, just like the socialists, have only ever pursued policies of bigger and more intrusive political and cultural bureaucracy.  Therefore, the paradigm of left vs. right now becomes tangible, because it is the left that seeks control, and the true right that wants to be left alone.

    To clarify even further, people who actually understand the false left/right paradigm only mention it when they are referring to the political class.  At the top of the pyramid and at the top of either major American party, there is no "Left", or "Right", there is only globalism.  However, for average people there is indeed an ideological spectrum.  This would not be such a problem except that at this time, it is people on the far LEFT of that spectrum that are in support of multiculturalism and globalization.  They are the group scrambling for control over everyone else and they are the group with funding and legal support from the elitist establishment.  Social justice lunatics and Black Lives Matter advocates have fashioned themselves as weapons for the elites.  Therefore, in this way, they have made the left/right paradigm real for those at the bottom of the pyramid.

    It’s interesting to me that the left, once considered the bastion citadel of rebellion against the machine, is now willingly diving head-first into the intestinal apparatus of the system to be mulched for fuel for the very same beast.  It just goes to show you how easily these fraudulent paradigms can change and how easily groups can be co-opted when they are oblivious to their own weaknesses.

    If you really want to know who we “deplorables” are it’s rather simple — we are the ones who refuse to participate in the operation of the machine.  We are the cogs who refuse to cooperate.  We will not grease the gears.  We will not stoke the furnace.  We will stop the whole damn thing in it’s tracks, because, for the sake of future generations, we must.

    This is why we are hated by socialists, cultural Marxists and the general inbred animal farm of the progressive zeitgeist.  We suggest that, in fact, not all steps forward are equal to “progress,” and not all progress is moral.  We maintain that what progressives call “progress” is actually classic and archaic barbarism wearing the silky lingerie of of humanitarianism.

    To assert that some progress is immoral is a sure way to trigger the modern collectivist left.  They just can’t fathom that anyone sane would disagree with the grand schemes of multiculturalism and economic harmonization.  We must be crazy.  We must be violent and aberrant monsters.  We must be filled with hate and racism and misogyny.  We must be “dealt with.”

    But here’s the deal…

    The institutions and people so desperate to define the deplorables never actually ask us to define ourselves for the public record.  They don’t WANT to hear what we have to say about ourselves.  They prefer to construct straw men.  It’s much easier to set fire to us that way.

    Oh sure, they’ll interview us once in a while, but an interview does not constitute an honest record of anything.  Just take a look at Bloomberg’s “interview” with Milo Yiannopoulos entitled The Pretty, Monstrous Face Of The Alt-Right in which they focus more on his salary, shopping habits and flamboyant homosexuality than his actual political or philosophical positions.  And, yet again, they call on the Southern Poverty Law Center, the cultural Marxist propaganda arm of the establishment, to give their take on who Yiannopoulos is.  Welcome to the club, Milo.

    Even I have been approached in the past by mainstream outlets including the BBC and The Economist for such interviews.  In the case of the BBC, I told them I would be happy to participate as long as I could bring my own video equipment to record the entire exchange.  They agreed, then never called me back.  I just ignored requests from The Economist; they are the rotting left ventricle of the heart of darkness.

    These people have no intention of letting us speak for ourselves.  They want to use us for ratings and then edit us into oblivion.

    The media certainly won’t refer to us as “the liberty movement” or as freedom fighters or any other label that might find favor with the general public.  Instead, they call us “populists,” which is a term with a decidedly fascist flavor to it.  The truth is, the rhetoric of elitists in Europe and in the U.S. is that those against globalism and multiculturalism are legitimate fascists.  If average people only understood the totalitarian leanings of your run-of-the-mill globalist they might find this accusation hilariously ironic.

    Alan Greenspan calls us “crazies” who will undermine the U.S. system.  Which is also ironic when you understand that it was Greenspan’s Federal Reserve that created the artificially low interest rate environment that initiated the derivatives bubble and credit crisis that has sealed America’s fiscal fate eight years later.  Greenspan even admitted back in 2013 that the Fed knew there was a debt bubble and “missed the timing” in dealing with it.  Yet, he blames us for America’s problems.

    In the past these hucksters ignored us.  We were a burgeoning movement rallying around marginalized figures like Ron Paul back then. It was better for them to pretend we didn’t exist.

    Now, we seem to be everywhere — busting up the EU with the Brexit referendum, overwhelming Merkel’s political power base in Germany, and pushing Donald Trump into what I have argued since the primaries will be a sure entry into the White House.  Now, all the full attention of the establishment is on us.  Imagine that.

    So, instead of listening to hypocrites and liars like those listed above, why not go to the source and ask a deplorable what we want.  I’ll be happy to explain our goals in my next article in this series, and set out to identify the movement that seems to have dumbfounded the progressive left and globalist acolytes alike.

    For now, I want to acknowledge that the rise of the deplorables does not necessarily ensure victory in the face of the elites.  As I have mentioned many times since before the success of the Brexit, it is possible that the elites are trying to give traditional conservative movements enough rope with which to hang ourselves.  That is to say, we are working to wrestle back control of a ship that is already sinking.  They might just step aside as we mutiny because in the end, they don't think it will matter.  Let’s not kid ourselves that this fight will be anything other than long and painful.

    Economically as well as socially, there is little chance of avoiding serious multiple crises over the course of the next few years.  It seems to me rather convenient that the catalysts for these crises are boiling over at a time of great awakening for the conservative guard and the liberty minded.  I do not think this is a coincidence.

    This is why I repeatedly remind people that a successful Brexit vote or a Trump presidency might send a message, but they are not solutions.  Do not be surprised if a Trump victory is followed by a global deluge of financial instability — instability that will be blamed on us.

    The narrative is already being set.  International financiers, central bankers and media personalities are consistently mentioning the great danger of the “populists.”  They say the deplorables are going to destroy the world.  This is nonsense, of course.  The world has already been destroyed by the banking elite and their cronies, but, the average person doesn’t really grasp this.  We have to educate them quickly because we are about to be targeted as scapegoats for one of the greatest engineered fiscal catastrophes of all time.

    In my next installment I will examine a list of issues that are at the core of "the deplorables" and our shocking ascendance in the sociopolitical sphere.  I will conclude by pointing out that every totalitarian action produces an equal and opposite reaction.  The progressive left and the globalists have become so intoxicated with collectivist power and so abusive in their application of the government authority that they have chiseled from the public, that now, everyone hates them.  Many people WANT to see the deplorables win.  It's not even necessarily about the viability of Trump.  They just want to watch as the pretentious faces of social justice thugs twist in shrieking horror when Trump takes the Oval Office, or as Britain flips the bird to the EU, or as Europe breaks apart over the madness of forced refugee policies.

    If anyone is to blame for the popular rise of the deplorables, it is the very leftists and globalists who despise us.

  • Texas Governor Threatens To Exit The Federal Refugee Program: "Empathy Must Be Balanced With Security"

    After taking in more refugees over the past 12 months than any other state in the U.S., Texas is threatening to exit the federal refugee program, effective 9/30/16, unless the Obama administration agrees to new security measures intended to protect Texas citizens.  The demands by Texas Governor Greg Abbot come just days after the recent bombings in New York and New Jersey and in response to Obama's recent announcement of plans to accept 110,000 refugees in 2017, up 57% since 2015

    Abbott released the following comments on his website saying, among other things, that the "refugee settlement program is riddled with serious problems" and that the "federal government lacks the capability or the will to distinguish the dangerous from the harmless."  Abbott also took the opportunity to blast Obama for "ineptly proposing a dramatic increase in the number of refugees" in 2017 saying that the U.S. is incapable of fully screening immigrants from nations like Syria.   

    “The federal government’s refugee settlement program is riddled with serious problems that pose a threat to our nation. The Director of the Federal Bureau of Investigation and the Director of National Intelligence have repeatedly declared their inability to fully screen refugees from terrorist-based nations. Even with the inability to properly vet refugees from Syria and countries known to be supporters or propagators of terrorism, President Obama is now ineptly proposing a dramatic increase in the number of refugees to be resettled in the U.S."

     

    Empathy must be balanced with security. Texas has done more than its fair share in aiding refugees, accepting more refugees than any other state between October 2015 and March 2016. While many refugees pose no danger, some pose grave danger, like the Iraqi refugee with ties to ISIS who was arrested earlier this year after he plotted to set off bombs at two malls in Houston."

     

    “Despite multiple requests by the State of Texas, the federal government lacks the capability or the will to distinguish the dangerous from the harmless, and Texas will not be an accomplice to such dereliction of duty to the American people. Therefore, Texas will withdraw from the refugee resettlement program. I strongly urge the federal government to completely overhaul a broken and flawed refugee program that increasingly risks American lives.”

    Over the past 12 months, Texas has accepted 7,205 refugees, more than any other state in the country, with ~750 of them from Syrian.

    Source: Graphiq

     

    Below is the letter sent by the Texas Health and Human Services Commission to the Federal Office of Refugee Settlement earlier today. 

    Texas Letter

  • Charlotte Riots Night 2: Police Unleash Tear-Gas, NC Governor Calls National Guard As Protests Turn Deadly – Live Feed

    Update 2: The situation is escalating quickly

    North Carolina Governor Pat McCrory declares state of emergency on request of Charlotte police chief

     

    North Carolina governor is also sending in the National Guard amid protests

    Update 1: The man shot earlier has died…

    As WSJ reports, the man fatally shot downtown just after 8 p.m. was shot by a civilian, according to the city of Charlotte.

     

     

    The Charlotte-Mecklenburg Police Department “did not fire the shot,” the city said in a tweet. City officials also confirmed that a police officer had been transported to a hospital for injuries.

    As we detailed earlier, night 2 of the protest in Charlotte following the shooting death of Keith Lamont Scott – an allegedly armed black man – by a black policeman, has turned considerably more violent. 

    As YourDailyDish repoerts,

    The Charlotte-Mecklenburg Police Department released a press release on the incident that read, “Officers observed a subject inside a vehicle in the apartment complex. The subject exited the vehicle armed with a firearm. Officers observed the subject get back into the vehicle at which time they began to approach the subject. The subject got back out of the vehicle armed with a firearm and posed an imminent deadly threat to officers who subsequently fired their weapon striking the subject.”

     

    On Wednesday morning, Police Chief Kerr Putney held a news conference regarding the killing. He provided new details, which seemed to corroborate the press release, contradicting the version of events that played out on social media Wednesday.

     

    Putney began by saying, “It’s time to change the narrative. Because I can tell you from the facts, that the story is a little bit different as to how it’s been portrayed so far, especially through social media.”

     

    The chief went on to describe the incident as such:

     

    “The officers gave loud, clear verbal commands that were also heard by many of the witnesses. They were instructing the subject, once he got out of the vehicle, to drop the weapon. Despite the verbal commands, Mr. Scott exited the vehicle as the officers continued to yell at him to drop it. He stepped out, posing a threat to the officers, and Officer Brentley Vinson subsequently fired his weapon, striking the subject.”

     

    The chief went on to describe what was found at the scene. “I can tell you a weapon was seized, a handgun, I can also tell you we did not find a book that was made reference to. We did find a weapon, and the witnesses corroborated it to, beyond just the officers.”
     

     

     

    This should not be a total surprise as we noted earlier comments:

    “We out like the Taliban!” one rioter was heard yelling on a live Facebook stream.

     

    “This ain’t no one-day action!” another shouted. “This is the first time people standing up!”

     

    “We ain’t playin’ no motherfuckin’ games, nigga!” asserted another individual.

    One person has been shot in Charlotte, North Carolina protests against the fatal police shooting of Keith Lamont Scott. Riot police are firing tear gas into the crowd.

    WCNC reported medics confirmed a gun shot wound on the corner of College and Trade. The victim had life-threatening injuries.

    Live Feed:

    Alternative Live Feed:

    This is reportedly the pool of blood from tonight's shooting…

     

    But tonight is worse than last night – considering it is early…

     

    And now even the media is being targeted…

     

  • Wall Street Goes "All In" For Hillary Clinton

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    Hordes of industry executives will descend on the city to celebrate Hillary Clinton’s nomination for president and renew close associations that vexed the Democratic standard-bearer throughout her primary battle with Bernie Sanders.

     

    Blackstone, one of the nation’s largest private equity firms, will hold an official reception in Philadelphia on Thursday featuring its president, Tony James, sometimes mentioned as a possible Treasury Secretary in a Clinton administration.

     

    The financial contingent will be in an especially good mood following Clinton’s selection of Virginia Sen. Tim Kaine as her running mate. Kaine has shown a willingness to fight for regional bank relief from the Dodd-Frank financial reform law. But more than that, he’s not Elizabeth Warren, the potential VP pick that long had Wall Street terrified.

     

    Republicans with ties to the financial industry will also be there, a sharp contrast to Donald Trump’s convention in Cleveland, which Wall Street largely shunned over fears of the GOP nominee’s populist agenda on trade, immigration and Wall Street reform.

     

    – From July’s post: Hillary Clinton is in Deep Trouble – “Hordes of Wall Street Executives” Descend Upon Philly

    Wall Street, America’s most despised industry, is putting all of its eggs in the Hillary Clinton basket. I must say, I’m actually pretty shocked at the extent to which the industry’s heavyweights are backing her. There’s really only one explanation they know she’s a sure thing.

     

    You don’t go into Wall Street to help the world. You go in to make money, stroke your ego and perhaps one day be lucky enough to be deemed “master of the universe” by some finance humping media outlet like Bloomberg or CNBC. Wall Street oligarchs aren’t rallying around Hillary because they find Trump offensive. The only thing these people find offensive is not making money. They know Hillary, they’ve paid Hillary, and they are 100% confident she will do their bidding. Trump on the other hand is unpredictable and injects into the environment what the current crop on Wall Street hates more than anything else, risk.

    The U.S. economy is totally rigged. While in the past, you were expected to take on a great deal of risk to earn an outsized return, most large returns these days have been gamed to such and extent that they amount to riskless schemes through which the U.S. taxpayer funnels money upward to a handful of oligarchs. Hillary will unquestionably keep this system in place. Trump, we just don’t know.

    This is why the real players Wall Street want Hillary. They want the riskless pillaging of society to continue uninterrupted. As usual, money talks.

    As The Hill reports:

    Hedge fund moguls are pouring stunning amounts of cash into the main super-PAC supporting Hillary Clinton’s presidential campaign.

     

    George Soros and Donald Sussman, liberal financiers based in New York, have now given at least $10.5 million each to Priorities USA, an outside group that has already reserved more than $150 million in advertising to help Clinton win the White House.

     

    Pushing him over the $10 million mark, Soros sent the super-PAC an additional $2.5 million in August, according to the latest reports from the Federal Election Commission.

     

    Sussman sent $2 million in August too, giving him an identical total donation to Soros.

     

    Soros scaled back his political spending during the Barack Obama years. Stories later emerged suggesting he’d been unhappy with the way he’d been treated by the president.

     

    An email released last year by the State Department showed Clinton ally Neera Tanden telling the then-secretary of State that when she spoke with Soros at a dinner, he’d told her he regretted supporting President Obama over Clinton in the 2008 Democratic primary.

     

    Recounting her conversation with Soros, Tanden told Clinton: “He’s been impressed that he can always call/meet with you on an issue of policy and said he hasn’t met with the President ever (though I thought he had.)”

     

    The latest injections of cash from Soros and Sussman continue a trend of Wall Street money flowing overwhelmingly to Clinton over her Republican rival Donald Trump.

     

    It’s highly unusual — perhaps unprecedented — for a Democratic presidential candidate to out-raise a Republican among the financial sector by the margin by which Clinton is out-raising Trump. 

     

    Citing data from the nonpartisan Center for Responsive Politics, the Wall Street Journal reported in July that “seven financial firms alone have generated $47.6 million for groups working on Mrs.Clinton’s behalf.”

     

    The comparable amount raised for Trump at that time was $19,000. And though his haul from the financial industry has increased substantially by now, it still pales in comparison to Clinton’s.

     

    Any questions?

    screen-shot-2016-09-21-at-11-23-41-am

    For prior articles on Hillary Clinton’s love affair with Wall Street, see:

    Hillary Clinton is in Deep Trouble – “Hordes of Wall Street Executives” Descend Upon Philly

    Hillary Consolidates Wall Street Support as Republican Financiers Shift to Clinton

    The Real Reason Hillary Clinton Refuses to Release Her Wall Street Transcripts

     

    COMPROMISED – How Two of Hillary Clinton’s Top Aides Received Golden Parachutes from Wall Street

  • House Oversight Committee Orders Reddit To Preserve "Oh Shit" Guy's Posts

    The House Oversight Committee, chaired by Jason Chaffetz (R-Utah), has issued a preservation order to Reddit related to all threads posted by Hillary’s tech guy from Platte River Networks, Paul Combetta (aka the “Oh Shit” guy).  The preservation order comes just days after a political researcher exposed a Reddit thread from July 2014 in which Combetta sought tech advice on how to strip out a VIP’s (VERY VIP) email address from a bunch of archived emails” (all of the details can be found in our previous post here:  “Dear FBI, This Is Intent: Hillary’s “Oh Shit” Guy Sought Reddit Advice On How To ‘Strip VIP’s Emails’“).

    In comments to The Hill, Chaffetz confirmed that the House Oversight Committee is pursuing the new Reddit discovery “with vigor” but noted that precautions were required to “verify the authenticity” of Combetta’s posts.  Meanwhile, Chaffetz did confirm that Reddit is “cooperating” with the preservation order

    The order “has the weight of law, you can’t destroy things and hope things magically get erased,” he told The Hill Wednesday.

     

    The allegations “fit the pattern of what we think was happening,” Chaffetz said.

     

    “We have to verify the authenticity but we are pursuing it with vigor,” Chaffetz said. “On the surface it may be accurate, but we’ve got to make sure [the Reddit posts] are preserved and we have to dive deeper into the authenticity.

    Let’s just hope that Reddit takes these preservation orders more seriously than Combetta who admitted to the FBI in March 2015 that he “was aware of the existence of the preservation request and the fact that it meant he should not disturb Clinton’s e-mail data on the PRN server” even though he went ahead and deleted her emails anyway.  

    We first wrote about the “Oh Shit” guy three weeks ago when the FBI decided to dump their redacted investigation notes on the world on a Friday afternoon before Labor Day weekend (see “The “Oh Shit” Moment: Hillary Wiped Her Server With BleachBit Despite Subpoena“).  After reviewing all of the FBI notes in detail, we concluded that post by noting that “something tells us this “Undisclosed PRN Staff Member” [Combetta’s identity had not been revealed at that point] is not going to make out as well as Hillary when all the dust settles”…With each passing day that prediction seems to be drawing closer to reality.  

  • Redneck Investin Part 2 – The evolved Redneck – READ before RIOT

    Due to the events in Charlotte, of which the participants are mostly of the lower class, and spectators of the upper; we thought it timely to release Part 2 in our Redneck series, Redneck Investin’ – a Look from the other side.  You can read part 1 here.  We released Splitting Pennies – Understanding Forex for the common man to understand the financial system from another perspective.  We encourage all rioters to pick up a copy and understand ‘the man’ instead of vandalizing private property and becoming 5 second celebrities on the local news.  

    So you don’t have any money to invest?  Think again!  The only capital is in between your ears (intelligence).

    Redneck Investin’ 1.1

    Gift Card Arbitrage

    It’s possible on ebay to buy a face value gas card or gift card for less than the face value.  The amount less will depend on the auction – you won’t have any guarantees here.  But for example it’s possible to buy a gift card for a retailer, 20% or even 40% discounted!  That means you could theoretically buy a $100 gift card for $50, $60, $70, or $90.  In many cases they’ll be in the money or in some strange cases out of the money.  We’re not going to point to any particular ebay listings to be fair – but they’re there.  Know what to look for!  Be sure you’re bidding on a GIFT CARD or GAS CARD that can be used to BUY GAS, or in a retail shop to buy PRODUCTS.  Make sure you are NOT bidding on a REWARDS CARD or other form of ‘special discount’ card.  Gift cards are no different than cash insofar as their spending ability.  Good luck!

    Crisp $100 Bill sales

    For some reason unbeknownst to the author, buyers are willing to pay more than $100 for a crisp, unused $100 bill.  Why?  Don’t ask – we don’t know!  But it’s legal, and the premium can be upwards of 20% or even greater!  But there’s a catch, getting fresh bills aren’t easy.  Plus, if you want to buy a whole ‘strap’ it’s going to cost you $10,000 for the whole 100 lot of $100 bills, which may be beyond your 401 Keg budget.  So you’ll have to get a few individually broken out of the strap, which will need to be organized by your local bank branch.  They probably won’t call you when they come in, so this may involve you going into the branch daily at a certain time (usually, banks will receive money deliveries at the same time daily or weekly depending on the population of the local area.)  Anyway, as many as you can obtain, you can load them up on ebay and rake in a risk free tidy profit!  Don’t forget to calculate ebays fees, and shipping.

    Fountain Coin Cleaning

    WARNING – THIS MAY BE ILLEGAL IN SOME AREAS.  CHECK WITH LOCAL LAWS AND LANDOWNERS BEFORE TRYING THIS.  Some fountain owners may want a cut!

    Many people believe that it’s ‘good luck’ to throw coins into fountains.  Other people think it’s ‘good luck’ to collect these coins and deposit them into their bank account!  Do this at night, around 3am – 5am when there’s the least chance of a coin tosser seeing you.  It will depress them and they will not throw coins in other fountains, thus damaging your future income.  NEVER COLLECT ALL COINS IN A FOUNTAIN – it will confuse coin tossers the next day, they will think this is a ‘no toss’ fountain.  Always leave 20% of coins to remind tossers that this is a ‘please toss’ fountain.

    Golf Ball recovery and sales

    Golfers are, well, there’s a lot of golf balls in lakes and water traps near golf courses.  Public courses are not as highly protected as the “Elite” country clubs, and it’s more likely to find a fellow Redneck groundskeeper willing to let you in at night to go night diving for balls.  He may want a cut of your spoils – be fair and share!  This is an honest job; the balls are in the water usually rotting away covered with moss and other lake elements that will ultimately deteriorate the balls.  Fancy courses have systems to rake the balls out of the water, but most municipal courses don’t.  Be fair, show you care!  Don’t charge more than $1 or $2 per ball.  If you’re in Florida – beware of Alligators.  

    Be sensitive to the local culture.  Remember this sign, in California – no martinis in the pool, please!

    If you want a quick Forex education, checkout Splitting Pennies – the pocket guide designed to instantly make you a Forex genius!

    If you want to get started looking at investing, checkout Fortress Capital Forex

    For financial institutions, checkout Liquid Claims Securities Settlement Serivces.

  • CLiNToN PaY To PLaY…

    CLINTON PAY TO PLAY

  • Not Even Goldman Has Any Clue How The BOJ Will "Control" The Yield Curve

    The biggest news overnight, and certainly far bigger than this afternoon’s non-event from Janet Yellen, was the significant change in monetary policy announced by the BOJ which (belatedly) unveiled its re-revised “QQE”… this time “with Yield Curve Control” (or “QQEWYCC“), a phrase used in lieu of “Reverse Operation Twist”, whereby the BOJ is hoping to steepen the yield curve and undo the damage it itseld created in January when it introduced NIRP for the first time to Japan, without doing much of anything else.

    While we laid out the theoretical big picture elements of QQEWYCC both earlier, and two weeks ago, there is a small problem when one gets into the practical nuances of the proposed monetary experiment: nobody really knows how it will work, not even Goldman Sachs, whose BOJ expert Naohiko Baba admitted that he has no clue how the BOJ will actually execute its vision.

    Confirming that the “JGB market has become increasingly distorted”, Baba says that

    it is very unclear at this time exactly how the BOJ intends to “control” the yield curve in the future. Based only on the official statement, we think it is likely it will maintain the yield curve at more or less the current level for the time being. However, the question is how it will control the overall level and shape of the curve when financial and economic conditions change in the future. While the JGB market needs to take time to study the BOJ’s intentions, with interest rate movements lessening, we think the pricing function of interest rates as a mirror reflecting real economic and financial conditions will be increasingly lost.”

    Ah yes, the old problem with nationalizing a market – whether it’s bonds or stocks – is that it is no longer, by definition, a market but merely a policy tool which has ceased to delivers any informational value whatsoever.

    And before market participants get too gloomy contemplating the existential void of participating in something that no longer exists, Goldman has some theoretical considerations on what the BOJ’s announcement meant, namely that under all that unclear verbiage unveiled last night, the central bank has begun a “stealth taper.” To wit:

    The BOJ emphasized that it has four means of easing at its disposal going forward: (1) the negative interest rate (short-term policy interest rate) on policy-rate balances in current accounts, (2) 10-year JGB yields (long-term interest rate), (3) expansion of asset purchases, and (4) expansion of the monetary base. The BOJ will continue to apply a negative rate of 0.1% for (1), while purchasing long-term JGBs so as to maintain long-term interest rates at around zero. We think the BOJ aims to control the yield curve by controlling these two interest rate targets, together with the introduction of new market operations as a backstop when interest rates rise.[1] The BOJ decided to maintain the pace of JGB purchases at around ¥80 tn a year for the time being, but it has effectively abandoned its previous monetary base target.

     

    Governor Kuroda of course denied this, but we think the introduction of yield curve control could be considered as paving the way for future tapering of JGB purchases. We think it is likely that by substantially changing the framework, the BOJ aims to attract the market’s focus to yield curve control and slowly move toward tapering in the background. In addition to the high likelihood that it will become increasingly difficult to maintain its large-volume JGB purchase program for technical reasons, the marginal benefits from expanding JGB purchases have already diminished vs. costs involved, as we have repeatedly mentioned. However, as many market participants forecast the forex rate based on the monetary base ratio between two countries, there is an obvious large risk to reducing purchases. Accordingly, we think the BOJ has judged that it needs to divert the market’s attention as early as possible in advance. As we mention later, our impression is that an exit from unprecedented easing is now much more distant. In our view, the BOJ needed to minimize market shock accompanying a shift in policy targets and also make the easing system longer-lasting and more sustainable.

    On this we agree with Goldman for one simple reason: in his erudite “take” of the BOJ’s announcement, Ben Bernanke (who was surely dejected that Kuroda did not take his advice to unleash helicopter money) today blogged that “it was puzzling that the BOJ retained its 80-trillion-yen quantity target for JGB purchases; one of these two targets is redundant. I presume that the BOJ was concerned that dropping the quantity target would lead market participants to infer (incorrectly) that the Bank was scaling back its program of monetary easing.”

    The fact that Bernanke said that it was incorrectly perceived that the BOJ is scaling back easing, is all we need to know that the BOJ is doing precisely that and by implication, that Goldman is right. In which case, watch out below,  USDJPY, not to mention Nikkei, and therefore Abe approval ratings.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 21st September 2016

  • Could Germany Ever Allow Deutsche Bank To Go Under?

    Via Golem XIV blog,

    Deutsche Bank, one of Europe’s behemoths, is in very deep trouble having lost 90% 0f its share price value since 2007, has been falling sharply all this last year (48% loss this year) and, with its $42 Trillion in Derivatives exposure was singled out by the IMF, as the bank which ,

    “appears to be the most important net contributor to systemic risks…”

    Of course Deutsche agues the standard ‘derivatives-aren’t-a-problem’ line, that this 42 trillion all nets out and their real exposure is a fraction of that vast figure. Which is fine as long as you think that in the event of Deutsche coming unstuck, 42 trillions-worth of derivatives contracts can be held in abeyance for the time it would take for all those contracts to be netted out.  As I’ve said before netting out is akin to getting a rowing boat full of people to all change places  without the boat overturning.

    And now Deutsche has been threatened by the US DoJ with a $14 billion fine for its crimes for selling knowingly over-valued RMBS (Residential Mortgage Backed Securities) in the build up to the financial crash of 2007.

    Deutsche cannot pay $14 billion without raising a great deal of cash. Deutsche has put aside $5.5 billion for paying fines. A mere 9 billion short. So could Deutsche go down? Financially yes it could. But politically, I doubt it. And it’s the tension between these two answers, between the parlous financial state and the huge political significance of Deutsche, that I find interesting.

    Deutsche is Germany’s only G-SIB (Global Systemically Important Bank).

    Deutsche is Germany’s financial flag carrier. It stands at the centre of Germany’s long held desire to have Frankfurt eclipse London as Europe’s financial centre. Although Germany also has Allianz as a G-SII (Global systemically Important Insurer), without Deutsche Bank Germany ceases to be a globally significant financial nation (G-SFN – OK I made that one up). Without Deutsche Germany would not sit at the top table of global finance. France would. France has three G-SIBs. The balance between France and Germany within Europe would shift. Maintaining that balance between France and Germany, at the heart of Europe, has been critical in European affairs since WWI.

    Could Germany ever allow Deutsche Bank to go under?

    Officially the global framework for G-SIFI resolution in bankruptcy has been laid down by the FSB and agreed by all. And interestingly, though they are touted as the result of new thinking since the financial crisis, they are not. I recently received an EU document marked ‘Secret’, entitled  “Overview of Financial Stability Resolution Issues” and dated Feb 2008 which describes pretty much what the FSB has now settled upon now. I mention this because almost every word in it was completely ignored once the crisis hit and each country viewed the imminent demise of their major, flag-carrying banks. Which leads me to wonder why I should believe it would be any different next time? I think this question is particularly critical to Germany because Deutsche is its only G-SIB. In the next massive implosion of debts, France could afford to let one of its G-SIBs go down and still have two seats at the top table. England could do the same.

    How will G-SIBs  be wound down?

    The not-so-new rules for how a G-SIB should be wound down begin by stating that,

    Resolution should be initiated when a firm is no longer viable or likely to be no longer viable, and has no reasonable prospect of becoming so.

    But no one has wanted to state exactly what the trigger is, for deciding that a bank is no longer viable. Except to say the global regulators will leave it to national regulatory authorities to decide. So Germany will decide when Deutsche is no longer viable. Sure, that’ll be grand.

    Should an authority take the fatal stop of admitting one of their G-SIBs is no longer viable then things are supposed to move with wonderful efficiency. Resolution of netting out is to be speedily concluded (in as little as two days!) No sniggering please. And then as the gruesome business of sorting the living from the dead parts of the bank gets going  the authorities must definitely NOT rely

    …on public solvency support and not create an expectation that such support will be available;

    Instead the dead parts will inflict losses first on share holders and then on bond holders in the time honoured order of unsecured first. And then those parts which are not completely dead and might be cut away to live again in a different body, are to be sold off by means of sale or merger.

    1. As a last resort and for the overarching purpose of maintaining financial stability, some countries may decide to have a power to place the firm under temporary public ownership and control in order to continue critical operations, while seeking to arrange a permanent solution such as a sale or merger with a commercial private sector purchaser.

    So public bail outs are supposed to be strictly temporary. No holding 80% of RBS for most of a decade. Really? But that’s not the point which is important for Deutsche Bank. The important point is that in any sale of the viable parts of Germany’s only G-SIB, the brutal fact of the matter is that there is no other German financial institution that could afford to buy any of it. Commerzbank? Allianz? Letting an insurer buy a bank? So imagine the situation for Germany. They lose their seat at the top table and then they watch as France, England, American or perhaps China buy the crown of German financial might.

    So I don’t think it will ever happen.  Or at least it will only happen when Germany is truly out of any other options.

    So if Deutsche is not going to be declared “no longer viable” what are the alternatives?

    One option is the UniCredit route. UniCredit was a trillion euro bank. It was Italy’s flag carrier. It had bought Bavaria’s banks and some of Austria’s as well. And yet it’s share price was always   paltry.  Just 7.6 Euros at the market top in May ’07.  And since then it has been a hollow and enfeebled giant. Lumbering and ineffectual. It has been the laughing stock of European banks. But Italy doesn’t seem to mind. They seem content to let UniCredit be the quintessential Zombie bank. Would Germany be as sanguine to leave Deutsche to go the same way?  This would, I suggest, be almost  as injurious to German pride and industrial policy as letting Deutsche go down completely.

    But if Germany decided it could not face the financial consequences of obeying the letter of the resolution law nor leave the bank to be a bloated and useless zombie then the alternatives bring in their train even greater political upheavals.  Imagine the German government decides that not bailing out Deutsche just inflicts too much damage on Germany – potentially reducing Germany from the front rank of globally significant nations to  something lesser. It becomes a matter of national pride if not of survival.

    So Germany ignores all the FSB rules and regulations and bails Deutsche bringing it into government ownership/protection –  call it what you like. In so doing it demolishes the entirety of European policy regarding bail outs, government debts and austerity. Where then all the German insistence on fiscal discipline it has forced upon Greece, Ireland, Portugal, Spain and Italy? The Bundesbank, Berlin and the ECB would have no authority at all. Every country would have a green light to do the same for their flag carriers.

    It would be the end the European experiment. Or the European system would have to try to continue without Germany. And that could only happen if all debts to Germany were repudiated.

    I realise all this is speculation. But Deutsche has lost 90% of its value. Only RBS has lost more.  Deutsche has 7000 legal cases against it. Frau Merkel is losing her grip, Brexit rocked the complacent rulers of Euroland and  Madame Marine Le Pen would like to push France to do the same.

    And on top of it all NOTHING has been fixed financially at all. There is more debt more leverage, more and more liquidity achieving less and less, interest rates are negative, pensions  are going nowhere, insurers are grasping for risk even as they fear what it will do to them when the next crisis hits and governments are all, every one of them, preparing their armed forces for widespread civil unrest.

     

  • Bank Of Japan Maintains Bond-Buying Pace With "Yield Curve Control", Leaves Rates Unchanged, But Offers Hope For Moar

    With SocGen and Goldman expecting nothing, but many others desperately hoping for more (2Y pricing in moar negative rates), tonight's Japanese trade deficit disappointment (11th monthly decline in a row) did nothing to help the chaos… and The BoJ waited the longest since 2014 to release its statement. Markets did their usual turmoiling bit with JPY dropping and Nikkei rallying from 2300ET… (on no news whatsoever) before the big decision was unveiled.

     

    The BoJ waited the longest since 2014…

    10/07/2014 12:57
    10/31/2014 12:44

    11/19/2014 11:24
    12/19/2014 11:28
    01/21/2015 11:29
    02/18/2015 10:49
    03/17/2015 11:04
    04/08/2015 11:36
    04/30/2015 12:04
    05/22/2015 10:49
    06/19/2015 11:04
    07/15/2015 11:18
    08/07/2015 11:18
    09/15/2015 11:07
    10/07/2015 11:00
    10/30/2015 11:22
    11/19/2015 11:17
    12/18/2015 11:50
    01/29/2016 11:38
    03/15/2016 11:35
    04/28/2016 11:01
    06/16/2016 10:45
    07/29/2016 11:44

     

    Since the last policy action (in Jan)…

     

    Bonds were expecting a lot…

    *  *  *

    And then the decision hit:

    Disappointment on rates (no change)

    • *BOJ MAINTAINS POLICY BALANCE RATE AT -0.100%

    But it appears BoJ unleashes its reverse twist idea…

    • *BANK OF JAPAN TAKES ADDITIONAL ACTION
    • *BOJ TO INTRODUCE QQE WITH YIELD CURVE CONTROL
    • *BOJ SCRAPS AVG MATURITY TARGET OF JGB HOLDINGS
    • *BOJ TO BUY JGBS IN LINE WITH CURRENT PACE (disappointing)

    And ups it ETF-buying…

    • *BOJ: 2.7T YEN OF ETF BUYS FOR ETFS THAT TRACK TOPIX

    Will do more jawboning…

    • *BOJ TO ENHANCE FOWARD GUIDANCE
    • *BOJ TO EXPAND MONETARY BASE UNTIL INFLATION STABLE ABOVE 2%
    • *BOJ BOARD VOTES 7-2 ON GUIDELINES FOR MARKET OPERATIONS

    So the bottom line is bigger ETF buying, maintains rates (no easing), maintains bond-buying (no easing), unveils "yield curve control" (steepens curve but crushes bank balance sheets through long bond MTM losses)

    But then they dropped the final tape-bomb…

    • *BOJ: MONETARY BASE MAY FLUCTUATE TO ACHIEVE YIELD-CURVE CONTROL

    In other words – QQE size may increase… which the market liked…

     

    And the yield curve is steepening notably…

     

    And banks are outperforming on the steepening…

     

    "Whatever it takes" moment…

    • *BOJ: COMMITTED TO EXPANDING MONETARY BASE UNTIL CPI EXCEEDS 2%

    But as Enda Curran, Bloomberg's  Chief Asia Economics Correspondent, notes,

    there's a risk of disappointment here. It's far from the shock and awe we've seen before from the BOJ and the moves to control the yield curve appear modest, at first glance.

    And one can see the disappointment in the market's response… 150 NKY points and one big fugure in JPY?

    The BOJ says it will buy JGBs "more or less in line with the current pace" of 80 trillion yen. Most observers would have said such a change in commitment meant the BOJ was tapering, and would have anticipated gains in the yen. That may still be the interpretation and reaction in time.

    And as far as the policy review, Bloomberg's Ken McCallum remarks,

    Quick read through BOJ policy review suggests, surprise! It thinks the policy is doing a good job. Says expansion of monetary base has led to a rise in inflation expectations, while negative rates have pushed down the yield curve.

    *  *  *

    Finally, because it's been a long night (and tomorrow will just make it longer), here is a littel humor (or not) as to where this leads…

    h/t @Colgo

  • With Trump Regaining North Carolina Lead, Hillary Unexpectedly Postpones Local Fundraiser "Without Reason"

    If there was a time Hillary needed to make a public appearance in the key battleground state of North Carolina to drum up voter support, it was today, if for no other reason than a just released Elon University poll finding Trump now has a modest 44% advantage among likely voters in the Tar Heel State, with 43% going to Clinton.

     

    According to the poll, most voters felt Trump would be better for rich people, white people and men, while most believe Clinton would be better for poor people, women and minorities.  “This election is so tight right now, that small swings of a few points should be expected between now and November,” said Jason Husser, assistant professor of political science at Elon and director of the Elon University Poll. “North Carolina has been extremely important over the last several election cycles with very tight election outcomes. These numbers suggest that will continue to be the case, and both campaigns would do well to continue to focus on the Old North State.”

    It’s not just the closeness of the poll that makes NC so critical; it’s also Trump’s recent rebound, which as shown in the following chart from Real Clear Politics has him taking the lead for the first time since late June.

    Which is why we find it surprising that with Hillary’s desperately needing to make an appearance, overnight CBS reported that Clinton campaign officials said that a Tuesday fundraiser in Chapel Hill was postponed.

    The Clinton event was billed as “lunch with Hillary Rodham Clinton” and had four donation levels to attend. Those contribution levels were described as $100,000, which featured “chair reception with Hillary,” $33,000, which included a “host reception with Hillary,” $5,000, which included “preferred seating” and $2,700.

    No reason was given for postponement of the Clinton event, which was planned to take place at the home of Betty Craven and Michael Warner.

    Is Hillary’s health once again becoming an issue?

    We don’t know, although based on a video recording of Hillary during a speech last night in Philadelphia, some neurological issues may have returned. As The American Mirror reported, “Hillary’s eyes appeared not in-sync with one another.” A montage of Hillary’s eye-catching moments before a small group of Temple University students can be seen below in footage by The American Mirror.

     

    Whatever the reason, Trump would take full advantage of Hillary’s absence to build on his momentum in the state: a small Eastern North Carolina town is preparing for Donald Trump’s appearance Tuesday. Trump will hold a rally in Kenansville Tuesday just two weeks after making a stop in Greenville. The rally will be held at the Duplin County Event Center and it is likely to be the largest event ever held in Kenansville, with a population of about 855.

    For Trump’s event, Between 7,000 and 10,000 people are expected to attend the rally, which could mean heavy traffic for the usually quiet town. Multiple law enforcement agencies in and around Duplin County are working together to prepare for the event.

    Pocket knives, handguns and other firearms are also not allowed in the event center. Sheriff Blake Wallace said there will be a designated area for any protesters as well. Doors for the event will open at 3 p.m. with Trump scheduled to speak at 5 p.m. Trump also plans to hold a rally in High Point around noon on Tuesday.

    Trump also took the opportunity to take a jab at Clinton’s over today’s surprising fundraiser “postponement.”

     

    Has Hillary’s health deteriorated again to the point where she can’t make public appearances due to pneumonia? We should know soon: her next public appearance is scheduled for tomorrow, when she is due to speak at a rally in Orlando, Florida.

  • Police Unleash Tear-Gas To Quell Riots In Charlotte After Police Shoot, Kill Black Male – Live Feed

    Large protests are taking place in Charlotte…

    As ABC30 reports, protesters gathered in Charlotte on Old Concord Road and police in riot gear are on the tense scene after police shot and killed a person carrying a gun Tuesday afternoon at a Charlotte apartment complex, officials said.

    The member of the Charlotte-Mecklenburg Police Department that was involved in the shooting has been identified as Officer Brentley Vinson. As is standard procedure with any officer involved shooting, Vinson has been placed on paid administrative leave. Vinson has been employed with the CMPD since July 21, 2014 and is currently assigned to the Metro Division.

     

    The man fatally shot was identified as Keith Lamont Scott. His family has been notified of his death. Both the officer and the dead man were identified by police as African-American.

     

    Charlotte-Mecklenburg police officers were at the complex about 4 p.m. looking for a suspect with an outstanding warrant when they encountered the person – not the suspect they were looking for – inside a car, the department said in a statement.

     

    The person exited the car with a gun, and then got back in, the statement said. When officers approached the car, the person got out of the car with the gun again.

     

    At that point, officers considered the person a threat and fired their weapons. Police Chief Kerr Putney told reporters at the scene that at least one officer shot the person.

    At least 100 protesters gathered to demonstrate the shooting Tuesday night. Police blocked access to the area, which is about a mile from the campus of the University of North Carolina at Charlotte. As Charlotte Observer reports,

    Police fired tear gas late Tuesday at several hundred people protesting an officer-involved fatal shooting in the University City area earlier in the day.

     

    Several dozen police officers in riot gear faced off with the shouting protesters on Old Concord Road at Bonnie Lane.

     

    A CMPD helicopter was circling very low over the crowd with a searchlight illuminating the protesters. Old Concord Road was shut down, with people standing in the middle of the road.

    At 10:53, police donned gas masks after a half-dozen water bottles were thrown. Tear gas was soon deployed.

    Live Feed:

    Alternate Live Feed:

     

    This just about summed it up…

  • U.S. Big Banks: A Culture of Crime

     

     

     

    U.S. Big Banks: A Culture of Crime



     

    Organized crime. This phrase is now a precise synonym for big-banking in the United States. These Big Banks commit big crimes; they commit small crimes. They cheat their own clients; they swindle outsiders. They break virtually every financial law on the books. What do all these crimes have in common? The Big Banks commit all these crimes again and again and again – with utter impunity.


    These fraud factories commit their serial mega-crimes, year after year, because the Big Banks know that they will never, ever be punished. On rare occasions, their crimes have been so egregious that U.S. ‘justice’ officials could no longer pretend to be oblivious to them. In such cases, there was a token prosecution, there was a settlement where the law-breaking banks didn’t even have to acknowledge their own criminality, and there was a microscopic fine – which didn’t even force the felonious financial institutions to disgorge all of their profits from these crimes.


    Criminal sanctions, by definition, are supposed to deter criminal conduct. The token prosecutions against U.S. Big Banks didn’t deter Big Bank crime, they encouraged it. But even these wrist-slaps were becoming embarrassing for this crime syndicate, so they dealt with this problem. The Big Bank crime syndicate told its lackeys in the U.S. ‘justice’ department that they were not allowed to prosecute one of its tentacles, ever again.


    The lackeys, as always, obeyed their Masters, and issued a new proclamation. The U.S. ‘Justice’ Department would never prosecute a U.S. Big Bank ever again – no matter what crimes it committed, no matter how large the crimes, no matter how many times the same Big Banks committed the same crimes. Complete, legal immunity; totally above the law. A literal culture of crime.


    What happens when you create a culture of crime in (big) banking? Not only the banks break laws – with impunity – their bank employees do so as well. Case in point: Warren Buffett’s favorite Big Bank – Wells Fargo. Wells Fargo employees came up with a good idea for boosting their salaries: stealing money directly out of the accounts of the bank’s clients.


    Consider how large this crime became, in just one of these tentacles of organized crime.


    L.A City Attorney Mike Feuer announced a $185 million settlement reached with Wells Fargo, after thousands of bank employees siphoned funds from their customers to open phony checking and savings accounts raking in millions in fraudulent fees. [emphasis mine]


    Thousands of bank employees stealing millions of dollars from bank customers, in tiny, little increments, again and again and again. But the story gets much worse. Why was a lowly city attorney involved with the prosecution of this organized crime?


    So where is the FBI? Where is the Department of Justice? How about California Attorney General Kamala Harris? Too busy campaigning for the Senate to notice? How about L.A. District Attorney Jackie Larry?


    Only City Attorney Mike Feuer took action, and he only has the authority to prosecute misdemeanors…


    There are only two ways in which the non-action of the U.S. pseudo-justice system can be explained:


    1. All of the layers of “justice” above the City Attorney, are completely bought-off, and refuse to prosecute one of the corporate fronts of their (real) Masters.
    2.  All of the layers of “justice” above the City Attorney considered this systemic crime by Wells Fargo’s employees to be nothing more than a misdemeanour.

     

    Take your pick. The U.S. pseudo-justice system is used to seeing so many multi-billion dollar mega-crimes being committed by these fraud factories that the systemic crime at Wells Fargo (which was ‘only’ in the $millions) didn’t even attract their attention. Or, the entire U.S. pseudo-justice system is completely bought-off and corrupt – and they refuse to prosecute Big Bank organized crime.


    A culture of crime.


    It gets still worse. Thousands of Wells Fargo employees stole millions of dollars, from countless clients. They were caught. But not even one banker was sent to jail. In a real justice system, systemic crime of this nature would/could only be prosecuted in one of three ways. Either every Wells Fargo criminal would be prosecuted to the full extent of the law (given the egregious nature of the crime), or Wells Fargo management would be prosecuted – because they would have/should have known about this crime-wave. Or else both.


    Bankers stealing money, directly and brazenly, right out of customer accounts, but no one goes to jail? A culture of crime.


    Understand that endemic, cultural changes of this nature don’t originate at the bottom of the corporate ladder. They originate at the top. In the case of the Wall Street crime syndicate; we already know that their management personnel are criminals, because they have admitted to being criminals.


    Many Wall Street executives says [sic] wrongdoing is necessary: survey


    If the ancient Greek philosopher Diogenes were to go out with his lantern in search of an honest man today, a survey of Wall Street executives on workplace conduct suggests he might have to look elsewhere.


    A quarter of Wall Street executives see wrongdoing as a key to success, according to a survey by whistleblower law firm Labaton Sucharow released on Tuesday.


    In a survey of 500 senior executives in the United States and the UK [New York and London], 26 percent of respondents said they had observed or had firsthand knowledge of wrongdoing in the workplace, while 24 percent said they believed financial services professionals may need to engage in unethical or illegal conduct to be successful… [emphasis mine]


    One-quarter of Big Bank management admitted that they “need” to commit crimes. A culture of crime. More needs to be said about the rampant, disgusting criminality among upper management in the Big Banks of the U.S. (and UK).


    A known whistleblower was conducting a public survey, asking known criminals how many of them were engaging in criminal behavior. What percentage of respondents would lie when answering such a survey? Three-quarters sounds about right. One-quarter of Wall Street executives admitted that committing crimes was a way of life. The other three-quarters lied about their criminal acts.


    Monkey see; monkey do. The lower level foot soldiers see their Bosses breaking laws, with impunity, on a daily basis. Their reaction, at Wells Fargo? “Me too.”


    Most if not all of the Wall Street fraud factories conduct detailed “personality testing” on their bank personnel. Are they looking to weed-out those with criminal (if not psychopathic) inclinations? Of course not. They conduct this personality testing to find which employees have no reservations about engaging in criminal conduct – so they can be fast-tracked for promotion.


    There is no other way in which the systemic criminality of senior banking personnel can be reconciled with the detailed personality-testing in which they participated, in order to reach that level of management. The Wall Street fraud factories look for the most amoral criminals which they can find. And with the exorbitant, ludicrous “compensation” they award to these criminals for their systemic crimes, they end up with (literally) the best criminals that money can buy.


    A culture of crime.


    As a final note; the U.S. system of pretend-justice already has a powerful weapon in its arsenal to fight organized crime: the “RICO” act. This anti-racketeering statute was created for one, precise purpose: to not merely prosecute/punish organized crime, but to literally dismantle the crime infrastructure which supports the organized crime.


    Not only does the statute confer strong (almost limitless) powers in gathering evidence of organized crime, it also permits mass seizures of assets – anything/everything connected to the organized crime of the entity(ies) in question. In the case of the Big Bank crime syndicate, where all of its operations are directly/indirectly tied into criminal operations of one form or another, if RICO was turned loose on these fraud factories, by the time the dust had settled there would be nothing left.


    Oh yes. If the U.S. ‘Justice’ Department ever went “RICO” on U.S. Big Banks, lots and lots and lots of bankers would go to prison, for a very, long time.

     

     

     


    Please email with any questions about this article or precious metals HERE

     

     

     

     

    U.S. Big Banks: A Culture of Crime


  • Protecting America's Children From Police-State Goons, Bureaucratic Idiots, & Mercenary Creeps

    Submitted by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    When an opponent declares, ‘I will not come over to your side,’ [Hitler] said in a speech on November 6, 1933, “I calmly say, ‘Your child belongs to us already.’”

    -As reported by historian William L. Shirer

    It’s not easy being a parent in the American police state.

    Danger lurks around every corner and comes at you from every direction, especially when Big Brother is involved.

    Out on the streets, you’ve got the menace posed by police officers who shoot first and ask questions later. In the schools, parents have to worry about school resource officers who taser teenagers and handcuff kindergartners, school officials who have criminalized childhood behavior, school lockdowns and terror drills that teach your children to fear and comply, and a police state mindset that has transformed the schools into quasi-prisons.

    In your neighborhoods, you’ve got to worry about the Nanny State and its network of busybodies turning parents in for allowing their children to walk to school alone, walk to the park alone, play at the beach alone, or even play in their own yard alone.

    And now in the last refuge for privacy—one’s home—parents are being put through the grinder, their actions scrutinized and judged by government goon squads armed with outrageous, overreaching, egregious laws that subject families to the hyped-up, easily offended judgment of the Nanny State.

    The latest slap in the face comes from the Arizona Supreme Court whose 3-2 ruling in Arizona v. Holle paves the way for parents to be charged as child molesters or sexual abusers for such innocent acts as changing their children’s diapers or taking baths with their kids.

    Now the court is not fully to blame for this idiotic ruling.

    That prize goes to the well-meaning idiots in the Arizona legislature who drafted legislation that criminalizes any contact between an adult and a child’s genitals, whether or not improper sexual intent was involved.

    By allowing this legislation to go unchallenged, however, the Arizona Supreme Court has created a paradigm in which parents are de facto sexual predators who, if formally charged, have the burden of proving their innocence “after a lengthy, expensive, and reputation-tarnishing trial,” as legal reporter Mark Joseph Stern writes for Slate.

    Not only would a parent accused under this law have to prove his or her innocence to the jury “by a preponderance of the evidence,” but they could be forced to spend an undetermined amount of time in jail just waiting to prove their innocence.

    The message is chillingly clear: your children are not your own but are, in fact, wards of the state who have been temporarily entrusted to your care. Should you fail to carry out your duties to the government’s satisfaction, the children in your care will be re-assigned elsewhere.

    In other words, the government believes it knows better than you – the parent – what is best for your child.

    This criminalization of parenthood has run the gamut in recent years from parents being arrested for attempting to walk their kids home from school to parents being fined and threatened with jail time for their kids’ bad behavior or tardiness at school.

    This doesn’t even touch on what happens to your kids when they’re at school—especially the public schools—where parents have little to no control over what their kids are taught, how they are taught, how and why they are disciplined, and the extent to which they are being indoctrinated into marching in lockstep with the government’s authoritarian playbook.

    The harm caused by attitudes and policies that treat America’s young people as government property is not merely a short-term deprivation of individual rights. It is also a long-term effort to brainwash our young people into believing that civil liberties are luxuries that can and will be discarded at the whim and caprice of government officials.

    This draconian mindset that sees young people as wards of the state is in keeping with the government’s approach towards individual freedoms in general.

    Surveillance cameras, government agents listening in on your phone calls, reading your emails and text messages and monitoring your spending, mandatory health care, sugary soda bans, anti-bullying laws, zero tolerance policies, political correctness: these are all outward signs of a government—i.e., a monied elite—that believes it knows what is best for you and can do a better job of managing your life than you can.

    This is tyranny disguised as “the better good.”

    Indeed, this is the tyranny of the Nanny State: marketed as benevolence, enforced with armed police, and inflicted on all those who do not belong to the elite ruling class that gets to call the shots. This is what the world looks like when bureaucrats not only think they know better than the average citizen but are empowered to inflict their viewpoints on the rest of the populace on penalty of fines, arrest or death.

    Unfortunately, even in the face of outright corruption and incompetency on the part of elected officials, Americans in general remain relatively gullible, eager to be persuaded that the government can solve the problems that plague us—whether it be terrorism, an economic depression, an environmental disaster, how or what we eat or even keeping our children safe.

    We have relinquished control over the most intimate aspects of our lives to government officials who, while they may occupy seats of authority, are neither wiser, smarter, more in tune with our needs, more knowledgeable about our problems, nor more aware of what is really in our best interests. Yet having bought into the false notion that the government does indeed know what’s best for us and can ensure not only our safety but our happiness and will take care of us from cradle to grave—that is, from daycare centers to nursing homes—we have in actuality allowed ourselves to be bridled and turned into slaves at the bidding of a government that could care less about our freedoms or our happiness.

    The lesson is this: once a free people allows the government inroads into their freedoms or uses those same freedoms as bargaining chips for security, it quickly becomes a slippery slope to outright tyranny.

    Nor does it seem to matter whether it’s a Democrat or a Republican at the helm anymore, because the bureaucratic mindset on both sides of the aisle now seems to embody the same philosophy of authoritarian government, whose priorities are to remain in control and in power. 

    Having allowed the government to expand and exceed our reach, we find ourselves on the losing end of a tug-of-war over control of our country and our lives. And as long as we let them, government officials will continue to trample on our rights, always justifying their actions as being for the good of the people.

    Yet the government can only go as far as “we the people” allow. Therein lies the problem.

    The choice before us is clear, and it is a moral choice.

    It is the choice between tyranny and freedom, dictatorship and autonomy, peaceful slavery and dangerous freedom, and manufactured pipedreams of what America used to be versus the gritty reality of what she is today.

    Most of all, perhaps, as I point out in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the choice before us is that of blindly obeying, never questioning, and marching in lockstep with the police state OR asking hard questions, challenging injustice, standing up to tyranny, and owning up to our responsibilities as citizens, no matter how painful, risky or uncomfortable.

    As Franklin D. Roosevelt observed, “We cannot always build the future for our youth, but we can build our youth for the future.”

  • Money Laundering Scheme Exposed: 14 Pro-Clinton Super PACs & Non-Profits Implicated

    Submitted by Andrew Kerr via The Citizens Audit,

    This is serious.

    • David Brock operates over a dozen pro-Clinton organizations from his office in Washington DC.
    • Uncovered records expose a constant flow of money between his organizations.
    • Brock’s unregistered Professional Solicitor, the Bonner Group, receives a 12.5% cut every time money is moved.

    There’s a reason why David Brock chooses to house an unregistered Professional Solicitor in his office to raise money for his conglomerate of Super PACs and non-profits.

    Professional Solicitors are required to disclose their active solicitation contracts.  Brock wants his unregistered solicitor, the Bonner Group, to keep their client list hidden for a very specific reason.

     

    David Brock is laundering money

    David Brock has 7 non-profits, 3 Super PACs, one 527-committee, one LLC, one joint fundraising committee, and one unregistered solicitor crammed into his office in Washington DC.

    Uncovered records expose a constant flow of money between these organizations.

    The Bonner Group, his professional solicitor, works off a commission.  Every time money gets passed around, Bonner receives a 12.5% cut.

     

    Follow the money

    Nonprofits are required to disclose who they give cash grants to.

    But they aren’t required to disclose who gave them cash grants.

    This weak system of one way verification is being abused by Brock.  He’s been cycling money between his organizations for years, and the Bonner Group’s 12.5% commission gets triggered after every pass.

    In 2014, Media Matters for America raised $10,021,188.

    The Bonner Group was credited for raising these funds.  Media Matters paid them a $1,147,882 commission.

    media-matters-bonner-commission

     

    That same year, Media Matters gave a $930,000 cash grant to David Brock’s Franklin Education Forum, an organization that shares office space with Media Matters.

    media-matters-grant-to-franklin-education-forum

    In 2014, the Franklin Education Forum reported $994,000 in total contributions.  93.6% of that total came from Media Matters!

     

    Surprisingly, though, the Franklin Education Forum gave full credit to Bonner for raising that money.  They paid the fundraiser a $124,250 commission in 2014!

    franklin-education-forum-bonner-commission

     

    Notice what happened?

    1. David Brock’s Media Matters gave a $930,000 cash grant to David Brock’s Franklin Education Forum
    2. David Brock’s Franklin Education Forum credited the Bonner Group for raising those funds, triggering the 12.5% commission
      • David Brock paid the Bonner Group a $124,250 commission to solicit a cash grant … from himself!

     

    It doesn’t stop there

    After the Franklin Education Forum retained $869,750, they sent a $816,224 cash grant to David Brock’s The Franklin Forum:

    franklin-education-forum-grant-to-franklin-forum

    Note: The ‘Franklin Education Forum’ is a 501(c)3, and ‘The Franklin Forum’ is a 501(c)4. They are not the same company.

    Since The Franklin Forum 501(c)4 paid Bonner a commission in 2013, it’s safe to assume fundraiser received a $102,028 commission in 2014. Unfortunately, it’s hard to tell for sure. They still haven’t filed their taxes for 2014!

     

    Let’s recap

    Say, for example, you donate $1,062,857 to Media Matters for America.   This is how David Brock would have used your charitable donation in 2014:

    1.  Media Matters would receive your $1,062,857 donation
      • The Bonner Group would earn a $132,857 commission
      • Media Matters would retain $930,000
    2. Next, Media Matters would give what’s left of your entire donation, $930,000, to the Franklin Education Forum
      • The Bonner Group would ‘earn’ a $116,250 commission
      • The Franklin Education Forum would retain $813,750
    3. The Franklin Education Forum would then forward the remaining $813,750 to The Franklin Forum
      • The Bonner Group would ‘earn’ a $101,718 commission
      • The Franklin Forum would retain $712,031

    In the end, Brock’s solicitor would have pocketed $350,825, almost a third of your initial donation! That’s a far cry from the advertised 12.5% commission.

    As bizarre as that scenario may sound, this is exactly what David Brock did in 2014.

     

    How can we be sure this is intentional?

    David Brock is the Chairman for each of these organizations!  How could he not know what’s going on?

    He’s a hands-on Chairman.  According to their tax returns, Brock allocates time, weekly, to his organizations:

    • Media Matters: 31.50 hours per week
    • Franklin Education Forum: 3 hours per week
    • The Franklin Forum: 1 hour per week

    Furthermore, the New York Times reports that David Brock shares a summer rental in the Hamptons with Mary Pat Bonner, the President of the Bonner Group!

    David Brock will have a hard time claiming ignorance on this.  These transfers are intentional.  He vacations with his solicitor.  Case closed.

     

    Still not convinced?

    David Brock didn’t even bother to give his organizations different phone numbers.  They all share the same phone number!

    same-phone-number

     

    What if…?

    We even located the Bonner Group’s solicitation agreement with Media Matters on Florida’s Gift Givers’ Guide.  Clarification on their commission can be found on page 2:

    bonner-contract-snip

    In English:  Contractually, David Brock has the option to exclude certain contributions from triggering the commission.  In spite of this option, he intentionally chooses to trigger the 12.5% commission for money grants between his organizations.

    Note: Yes, we are making the assumption that all of Brock’s organizations have the same solicitation agreement with the Bonner Group.  Given that his organizations share the same address, board members, and telephone number, we feel it’s safe to assume they also share the same solicitation agreement.

     

     

    This barely scratches the surface

    Utilizing public facing tax returns, along with records submitted to the FEC, we mapped out all the significant money transfers from 2014 that took place in Brock’s office:

    brock-transfers-2014-part-1

    brock-transfers-2014-part-2

    This is all from just one year!  No further commentary required.

    We understand this may be hard to believe.  We first came across this in July, and are still having a hard time wrapping our heads around it.

    All of the data referenced in this article originated from publicly accessible sources.  Check for yourself – we provided links to the source material in our article exposing the organizations operating in Brock’s office,  This data has been sitting out in the open, gathering dust for years! 

     

    Summary

    If it looks like a duck, swims like a duck, and quacks like a duck, then it probably is a duck.

    We’ve spent months trying to find some sort of loophole to justify this activity.  But there aren’t any loopholes.  David Brock has something to hide.  Just last week, The Daily Caller reported the following:

    “Brock’s former long-time live-in boyfriend William Grey (whom Brock has thanked in several of his books) threatened to go to the IRS with damaging information about how Brock was running his Media Matters empire.  What did Brock do? He paid Grey $850,000 to keep quiet. Brock reportedly had to sell his home in Rehoboth, Delaware to come up with the money. This certainly seems to indicate that Brock was terrified about what the authorities would uncover.”

    Adding to this, Fox News reported the following:

    “Grey accused Brock of “financial malfeasance” and threatened to undermine Brock’s fundraising efforts.

    “Next step is I contact all your donors and the IRS,” Grey wrote in an email dated May 19, 2010. “This is going to stink for you if you do not resolve this now.””

    We believe that the information presented in this article is what has Brock so terrified.  We feel confident in saying, with close to absolute certainty, that David Brock is laundering money through his Media Matters conglomerate.

    Look at the argument we’ve been making on The Citizens Audit:

  • "We Haven't Seen This Since The Great Depression" – Gallup CEO Destroys The "Recovery" Lie

    By Jim Clifton, Chairman and CEO at Gallup

    The Invisible American

    I’ve been reading a lot about a “recovering” economy. It was even trumpeted on Page 1 of The New York Times and Financial Times last week.

    I don’t think it’s true.

    The percentage of Americans who say they are in the middle or upper-middle class has fallen 10 percentage points, from a 61% average between 2000 and 2008 to 51% today.

     

    Ten percent of 250 million adults in the U.S. is 25 million people whose economic lives have crashed.

    What the media is missing is that these 25 million people are invisible in the widely reported 4.9% official U.S. unemployment rate.

    Let’s say someone has a good middle-class job that pays $65,000 a year. That job goes away in a changing, disrupted world, and his new full-time job pays $14 per hour — or about $28,000 per year. That devastated American remains counted as “full-time employed” because he still has full-time work — although with drastically reduced pay and benefits. He has fallen out of the middle class and is invisible in current reporting.

    More disastrous is the emotional toll on the person — the sudden loss of household income can cause a crash of self-esteem and dignity, leading to an environment of desperation that we haven’t seen since the Great Depression.

    Millions of Americans, even if they themselves are gainfully employed in good jobs, are just one degree away from someone who is experiencing either unemployment, underemployment or falling wages. We know them all.

    There are three serious metrics that need to be turned around or we’ll lose the whole middle class.

    1. According to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, the percentage of the total U.S. adult population that has a full-time job has been hovering around 48% since 2010this is the lowest full-time employment level since 1983.
    2. The number of publicly listed companies trading on U.S. exchanges has been cut almost in half in the past 20 years — from about 7,300 to 3,700. Because firms can’t grow organically — that is, build more business from new and existing customers — they give up and pay high prices to acquire their competitors, thus drastically shrinking the number of U.S. public companies. This seriously contributes to the massive loss of U.S. middle-class jobs.
    3. New business startups are at historical lows. Americans have stopped starting businesses. And the businesses that do start are growing at historically slow rates.

    Free enterprise is in free fall — but it is fixable. Small business can save America and restore the middle class.

    Gallup finds that small businesses — startups plus “shootups,” those that grow big — are the engine of new economic energy. According to the U.S. Small Business Administration, 65% of all new jobs are created by small businesses, not large ones.

    Here’s the crisis: The deaths of small businesses recently outnumbered the births of small businesses. The U.S. Census Bureau reports that the total number of business startups and business closures per year crossed for the first time in 2008. In the nearly 30 years before that, the U.S. consistently averaged a surplus of almost 120,000 more business births than deaths each year. But from 2008 to 2011, an average of 420,000 businesses were born annually, while an average of 450,000 per year were dying.

    Bottom line: The two most trusted institutions in the U.S. are the military and small business. Most people know about our military’s importance, but not as many appreciate the role small business plays in creating the majority of new jobs and in national security itself.

    America needs small business to boom again. Small businesses are our best hope for badly needed economic growth, great jobs and ultimately accelerated human development. When we get small business to boom, we can save America, restore our middle class and once again lead the world.

  • Metals Producer Is China's First State-Owned Company To Liquidate In Bankruptcy

    After a struggle to repay its debts since 2015, Guangxi Nonferrous Metals Group, a regional Chinese state-owned metal producer, has finally been declared bankrupt by a Chinese court, becoming the country’s first interbank bond issuer to fail. It is also China’s first bankruptcy case in which a state-owned company has liquidated.  As Caixin first reported, nine months after the state-owned Guangxi first filed for bankruptcy, a Nanning court on Sept. 12 granted the company’s application to liquidate.

    What makes this bankruptcy unique is that while several state-owned enterprises have already gone bankrupt in the past two years due to a failure to repay bank or corporate debt, until recently an unheard of event in China, Guangxi Nonferrous is the first SOE to fail after defaulting in the highly liquid interbank bond market.

    The implications will be substantial in a market in which the central bank “put” when it comes to bond issues, had been pervasive until recently.

    According to Caixin, the bankruptcy will likely deter foreign investors from China’s bond markets, which are facing increasing risks of default as the country embarks on supply-side reform to cut industrial overcapacity. More than 30 bonds have defaulted as of June, according to data provider Wind. Dongbei Special Steel, a producer of alloys for automakers and other manufacturers, defaulted on seven bonds with a combined value of 3.1 billion yuan between March 28 and late July.

    The Guangxi Nonferrous bankruptcy had been closely followed as a case study of how China will resolve complex bankruptcies that mixed private and public funding.

    Based in the southern Guangxi region, the company succumbed after three years of losses and, despite government subsidies, failure to repay its debt. Problems started to surface in June 2015 when the metals company said it was having trouble repaying rmb 1.3 billion of principal and rmb 62.92 million of interest on its private placement note.

    Despite a subsequent bailout by its lender, China Development Bank, one of the country’s three policy banks which later stepped in to rescue Guangxi Nonferrous, the metals maker defaulted, again, just a few months later on three other bond payments that were due in November, February and most recently in April, when it missed payment on a rmb 500 million yuan 3 year private placement note with a 5.56% coupon (which was rated BB). The metals producer cited in the notice “consecutive losses and the fact that it has already entered bankruptcy reorganization procedures” as reasons for the missed payment.

    Which is a valid point: you can’t go more bankrupt if you are already bankrupt.

    Based on company filings, Guangxi Nonferrous owed a total of rmb 14.51 billion to 108 creditors, including China Development Bank, Minmetals International Trust and Shanghai Pudong Development Bank.

    Founded less than a decade ago in 2008 by the SOE regulator State-owned Assets Supervision & Administration Commission (SASAC) in Guangxi, the company engaged in mineral exploration and mining development. But its troubles started long ago, when it reported a combined loss of rmb 2.29 billion from 2012 to 2014 as the industry was struggling with declining demand and a supply glut amid an economic slowdown. “The nonferrous metal industry has been in a downturn, and also the company faced limited returns from previous investments,” said a person close to the firm cited by Caixin, adding the two factors eventually led to a negative cash flow.

    Despite its second default in early 2016, the company was once again given a 6-month leeway by the government to find a way to continue as a going concern, preferably with a vastly deleveraged balance sheet. In a February statement to the Shanghai Clearing House, a government financial institution for the interbank market, the metals company said it filed an application for bankruptcy in Nanning Intermediate People’s Court in December. However, the court gave the company a grace period of six months and set up a committee made of local government and party officials to restructure the debts.

    However, the third time would not be the charm for the insolvent, cash-bleeding SOE: a person inside Guangxi Nonferrous told Caixin that the committee reached out to more than 100 investors to bail out the firm, but only five expressed interest. No deals were reached.

    Creditors apparently were dissatisfied with the results of the negotiations and blamed their failure on the local SOE regulator. “As far as we know, Guangxi SASAC did not provide any detailed plans or give any promises to potential investors,” one creditor said. “Inviting investors was just a formality.”

    In August, creditors submitted a written complaint to the National Association of Financial Market Institutional Investors, which oversees the interbank bond market, accusing the reorganization committee of ignoring creditors’ interests. “The committee did not follow rules to reveal information regarding the restructuring to the public; neither did it communicate with creditors.”

    “The key question now is how much money bondholders can claim,” said Ivan Chung, managing director and head of China credit research at Moody’s Investors Service in Hong Kong. Citic’s Ming expects that the “the claim ratio for creditors will not be high.”

    And thus concludes China’s ad hoc attempt to implement Chapter 11 reorgnization in a corporate culture that has rarely if ever dealth with multiple stakeholders seeking to split apart a bankrupt entity. In liquidation disaster.

    According to Caixin, it is not clear how Guangxi Nonferrous Metals will be liquidated. According to China’s Company Law, the court will administer a bankruptcy auction to sell the company’s assets. The gains will be used to pay employees first, then taxes and eventually creditors. The restructuring committee estimated that the company will need to raise 16 million yuan from the auction to pay around 110 employees. The payment is calculated based on how long an employee worked at the firm and the average salary for the 12 months before the bankruptcy, the person inside the company said. The decision has upset some employees because the company reduced the average salary by almost 50 percent at the beginning of this year.

    Where it will get hairy is once the company’s already unhappy workers realize there is no more job for them. “Employees are still calm, but once the liquidation plan becomes clear, I’m afraid the conflict between the company and the workers increase,” the Caixin source said.

    And while one liquidation of a SOE will be manageable, even if it means all workers have to be transplanted elsewhere, what happens next, now that the seal has been broken, and many more state-owned companies follow in Guangxi’s footsteps. Can China keep a lid on all the upcoming “conflicts between company and workers”, which as we have said since 2013, is the main reason why China is so terrified of terminal corporate failure.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 20th September 2016

  • Europe Is Doing Its Best To Pull Itself Apart

    By Richard Breslow, a former FX trader and fund manager who writes for Bloomberg

    At the end of last week, the EU-27 held what was meant to be a reaffirmation of their joint commitment to solidarity and outline their plan to make Europe great again. It was all laid out in the loftily titled “The Bratislava Declaration.” Unfortunately, the document was about as far as things got.

    But for the fact that it’ll be quickly and mercifully forgotten, the summit would go down in history as highlighting the very issues that render the continent dangerously divided. We no longer talk about the “sick man of Europe,” rather that Europe is sick.

    The meeting was preceded by European Commission President Juncker’s 2016 State of the Union speech. He reminded the parliamentarians that “the next 12 months are decisive if we want to reunite our union.” How many times have we heard that before?

    His punchline was ironic, given the ensuing finger-pointing and anger. “Europe is a cord of many strands -– it only works when we are all pulling in the same direction.”

    Hungary Prime Minister Orban blasted the group’s efforts on immigration in vitriolic terms. Vowing to submit counter- proposals on behalf of eastern countries. Ideas in direct contravention of Merkel’s ideas.

    Luxembourg, you’ll remember, recently suggested that Hungary should be excluded from the Union altogether for its “massive violation” of the core values of the EU. Now that’s cohesion for you.

    Italian Prime Minister Renzi refused to take part in a joint press conference with Merkel and Hollande. He shed any diplomatic niceties over the unwillingness of those heads of state to give him the budgetary flexibility he needs to deal with a banking crisis in full bloom. He accused them, and Spain, of breaking Union rules while putting his economy at full risk.

    About the only thing they all do agree on is that European banks can’t afford the capital levels suggested by Basil III. Not very comforting coming from a continent with nearly half of the world’s systemically important banks.

    Angela Merkel said, “Europe is not at all in a good state.” And Europe is famous for waiting until the last second to actually address crises. The danger is that threats are flowing from so many holes that plugging up the leak at the last moment may take more fingers than the Little Dutch Boy of myth has.

    *  *  *

    Full Bratislava Declaration below…

    Bratislava Declaration

  • The Grand Global Circus: 2016 US Presidential Elections

    Submitted by Gulam Asgar Mitha via Orientalreview.org,

    Politics is the art of looking for trouble,
    finding it everywhere, diagnosing it incorrectly
    and applying the wrong remedies—Groucho Marx

    When I was young I remember how excited many of us children would be to visit the circus when it came to town. For us the best part was the opening, the clown or the joker. We’d have bundles of laughs with their slapstick humour and pranks. Sometimes the clown would be a male and sometimes a female but that did not matter. It was the entertainment. After the laughter came the juggler with either 6 or 8 or 10 balls going from one to the other hand. Not one would drop. Incredible! Sometimes instead of the balls, it’d be rings of fire. Awesome! Breathtaking! There’d be few more circus acts that used to follow but nothing quite like the clown’s or the juggler’s entertainment.

    Several decades have passed since I last visited a circus and now that I’m a grown-up, the circus is here on the global stage in the year 2016. I’m referring to the US Presidential elections in November, the last act of the circus whose outcome is known. However what is most interesting has been the clown and the juggler acts for this grown-up child. These two players have kept the world fully entertained.

    The clown: Donald Trump. His verbiages and sarcasms are laughing matter and one wonders when they’ll change in the next few minutes because they’re so entertaining. Even when he does not speak, his silent facial expressions captured by the media are equally entertaining. At best he is honest.

     

    The juggler: Hillary Clinton. Her very few verbiages and sarcasms are missing and she is a serious entertainer, unlike the clown. She even came with an assistant Bernie Sanders. The juggling is no laughing matter because it is a very serious act.

    None of the Republicans even care to support their clown. They all want Hillary to be the successor to the incumbent Obama. She did a fantastic job in Libya as Obama’s Secretary of State, bombing the country to shambles and leaving a legacy of disarray and mayhem.

    In one of my previous article “Beyond the Nuclear Deal: A Civil War in the Middle East“, I’d written that the two US political parties hiding under the garbs of “democracy” are both right wingers (conservatives, liberals, neocons, fascists, capitalists etc.) pursuing the same geopolitical agenda in the Middle East. On one hand the Republicans are pursuing a belligerent agenda while the Democrats are pursuing a diplomatic agenda. The goal for both parties is exactly the same, that being global hegemony and survival as an empire. This ideology is shared among their right wing NATO partners and all are beating on the war drums while at the same time working hypocritically for peace. It is lamentable that Muslims and their leaders fail to understand the obvious.

    Tehran Times of 5 August 2016  reported Ali Akbar Velayti (close confidante of Iran’s supreme leader Ali Khamenei) stating that “There is no difference between the Republicans and Democrats in terms of their stance on our country and as we see the Democrats also create obstacles to the JCPOA agreement (of 14 July 2015) with Iran.” Khamenei asserted that “We do not violate the deal, but if the other party violates it, if they tear the agreement up, we will light it on fire,” He was referring specifically towards US belligerence with Iranian missile program and most recently after US Republican Congressman Peter Roskam’s bill of 9 July got passed blocking sale of Boeing and Airbus aircrafts without any significant Democratic opposition. Roskam cited that Iran would use the aircrafts for military purposes.  Both US political parties are sowing the seeds of the great Shia-Sunni civil war.

    the-circus-2

    The final act will be played out between the clown and the juggler and the winner will be declared by the media on 8 November. In the meantime, pollsters will be handing out questionnaires to the circus participants for their feedback and reporters will go around with questions as to who has been the best performer.

    Now let’s get serious. I’m one of the circus participants, a Muslim. I’ve hated Trump because of his anti-Muslim or anti-immigrant verbiages and sarcasms so on the poll card I’m going to give him very low marks and when the reporter comes to me with his microphone, I’ll just say, without any thoughts, that I’m going to vote for Hillary, a pro-Muslim, pro-immigrant Presidential candidate.

    Khizr Khan whose son died for America some few years ago did not come on his own to the DNC; he was invited because as a Muslim he’d be in a better position to convince his compatriots. Many things are known about him – some rumors, some facts – but one is that, as an attorney, he also used to work for Hogan, Hartson and Lovells law firm within Washington DC which has direct ties to the Clinton Foundation.

    Khizr came to the DNC to convince Muslims (and immigrants) that Hillary is the hope for them. Not Trump. At least Trump is honest to state that “the elections are rigged in favor of the ‘Devil Hillary Clinton’?”. There is no doubt that the elections will be staged in favor of Clinton.

    Very few Americans can see through Clinton’s design which will be revealed after she moves in to occupy the White House and forms her cabinet. One sure sign of an impending civil war will be the neo-cons in the cabinet. Victoria Nuland is Hillary’s protégé at the State department. Will she or her husband Robert Kagan, one of the co-founders of PNAC (Project for the New American Century) be selected Secretary of State in the cabinet? There are the other influential neo-con Kagans namely Fredrick Kagan (brother of Robert Kagan) or his wife Kimberly Kagan who founded the Institute for the Study of War- a hawkish Washington group favoring an aggressive American foreign policy. Clinton also has a Muslim protégé – Huma Abedin (fluent in Arabic as she had lived in Saudi Arabia with her Indian mother and Pakistani father) appointed as Clinton’s deputy chief of staff and vice chairwoman for 2016 campaign for president. Khizr will have good company in the state department.

    On Election Day all the Muslims and the immigrants will vote for Hillary as the first woman President who will follow the first black president into the White House. The US does not tolerate gender, religious, color, ethnic or race discrimination. But what will Hillary do for Muslims in return that Trump would never have been able to do? You guessed it – start a Shia-Sunni civil war. For her it’ll be a simple matter, exactly what she did in Libya. John Kerry has prepared the groundwork for her with the Iran card to get the war started on a yet unknown pretext.

    The civil war in the Middle East will not only be about Israel’s security but also an American imperative as a global empire and for the control of the vast energy resources under the desert sands.

  • Chinese Loan Demand Drops To All Time Low

    With China’s latest housing bubble once again in full swing, when as reported overnight the average new-home price in China’s 70 cities rose 1.2% in August, the biggest monthly increase in six years…

     

    … the euphoria for home purchases can be easily explained: an epic burst of mortgage loan issuance, serving as the false foundation for China’s latest home buying spree.

    However, step away from the residential housing market, and things turn decidedly sour. As Caixin reported overnight, loan demand in China, as opposed to record supply, 

    … has plunged to all time lows. Specifically, the willingness of Chinese companies to borrow reached dropped to the lowest print in the series’ 12 year history, according to a survey published by the country’s central bank on Sunday.

    Amid China’s accelerating economic slowdown, the country’s overall index of loan demand was at 55.7 in the third quarter, the lowest since the People’s Bank of China started to compile the data in 2004. The index of loan demand from medium-sized enterprises fell to 52 and for small business to 55.8, both historic lows. However, the figure for large corporations slightly rebounded at 51.4, up 0.1 points from a quarter earlier.

    Faced with a slower economy, small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) now find it difficult to expand their businesses, said an SME loan manager at one of China’s midtier commercial banks who did not want to be named, citing bank policy against speaking to the media. He said his bank has been losing borrowers since the first half of 2015.

    Additionally, banks have imposed tougher rules on approving loans to SMEs amid rising non-performing loans. Tighter restrictions, in turn, have cooled companies’ enthusiasm to seek new funds from banks, the SME loan manager said.

    And here is a stunning statistic you will likely not hear anywhere else as it may shake the very foundations of China’s house of cards: “20% to 30% of his business customers haven’t repaid their debt, he said.”

    As we have reported for years, in the latest period, 12 out of China’s 16 publicly listed banks saw a rising level of non-performing loans in the first half of 2016 compared with the same period a year before.

    At the same time, and explaining the rise in NPLs, the demand by manufacturers for loans declined in the third quarter, falling to 46.8 from the second quarter’s 48.

    Chinese manufacturers’ growth stagnated in August, with the Caixin China Purchasing Managers’ Index coming in at 50, down from 50.6 the previous month. The PBOC’s index of loan demand from the non-manufacturing sector remained unchanged at 55.1.

    Some more Chinese fiction peddling: more than half of the bankers from the 3,100 institutions surveyed by the central bank said the national economy in the third quarter was “cooling down,” while 44.6 percent of them thought the overall trend looked “normal.” That’s more than half who said China’s economy was set for more economic deterioration.

    Finally, of the 20,000 residents surveyed, 53.7% said the housing prices are “high and unacceptable,” 0.3 percentage points more than in the second quarter. Only 3.4 percent described prices as “satisfactory,” and the remaining 42.9% considered them “acceptable.” Then again, if loan demands continues to collapse at this record pace, the clearest indication yet that China is indeed headed for a hard landing despite the trillions in new loans created (which go who knows where if they are not actually demanded), all those house prices will soon become far more affordable.

  • US Supplies Saudi Arabia With White Phosphorus, Provided Bombs Used In Strike On MSF Hospital

    Three years ago, the great democracies of the west used a specially produced media campaign in which they paraded a doctored YouTube clip showing a chemical attack allegedly perpetrated by the Assad regime against his own people, to unleash the first military intervention in Syria, with the intention of removing the country’s president; a military campaign that has not only gone nowhere, but has led to the deterioration of a bloody and relentless civil war whose refugees may soon cost Angela Merkel her political legacy, led to the advent of the Islamic State one year later, and the intervention of not only Russia one year ago but – most recently – China, also on the side of the Saudi regime.

    Much less has been said about a the deadly military campaign waged by US ally, and generous Clinton Foundation donor, Saudi Arabia, which on March 26, 2015 began carrying out airstrikes in Yemen and imposing an aerial and naval blockade on the country, allegedly in response to requests for assistance from the contested government of president Manusur Hadi, who asked for help to quell an uprising by Houthi forces loyal to former president Ali Saleh, who had been deposed in the 2011 Arab Spring uprisings.

    The reason why this particular campaign, which continues to this day with thousands of innocent civilian casualties, has been largely swept under the rug is because of the direct and indirect involvement of US support which according to a new report, may include the highly controversial compound, white phosphorus.

    According to WaPo, Saudi Arabia appears to be using U.S.-supplied white phosphorous munitions in its war in Yemen, based on images and videos posted to social media, raising concerns among human rights groups that the highly incendiary material could be used against civilians, something which is banned by the Geneva convention. Under U.S. regulations, white phosphorous sold to other countries is to be used only for signaling to other troops and creating smoke screens. When the munition explodes, it releases white phosphorous that automatically ignites in the air and creates a thick white smoke. When used against soldiers or civilians, it can maim and kill by burning to the bone.

    The WaPo reports that while it is unclear exactly how the Saudis are using the munitions, the government has already received widespread condemnation for its indiscriminate bombing in civilian areas since its campaign against rebel forces in Yemen began in 2015. U.S. officials confirmed that the American government has supplied the Saudis white phosphorous in the past but declined to say how much had been transferred or when. After reviewing a social media image taken from the battlefield that showed a white phosphorous mortar shell, a U.S. official told the Washington Post it appeared to be American in origin but could not trace it to a particular sale because some of the markings were obscured.

    “The United States expects any recipient of U.S. military assistance to use those items in accordance with international law and under the terms and conditions of any U.S. transfer or sale,” said a State Department official, who spoke on the condition of anonymity to discuss politically sensitive issues. Only in this case, Saudi Arabia appears to have an exemption.

    The official said the department was looking into reports of Saudi forces’ improperly using U.S.-supplied white phosphorous munitions. “If a country is determined to have used U.S.-provided weapons for unauthorized purposes, the U.S. will take appropriate corrective action,” the official said.

    While the United States has grown wary of its material support to the Saudi military, it continues to provide Saudi Arabia with billions worth of weapons in periodic “deals.” Still, in May, the Obama administration halted the sale of roughly 400 cluster bombs to the Saudis after human rights organizations documented the weapons’ use in civilian areas. This week, lawmakers on Capitol Hill moved to delay a $1 billion arms deal that would replace some of Saudi Arabia’s U.S.-supplied tanks that have been damaged in the conflict.

    International humanitarian law does not ban the use of white phosphorous outright, but there is a strict requirement that it be used only in areas clearly separated from civilians. Even using it against enemy combatants has raised concerns, given that the munitions can cause particularly horrific injuries. In the case of Saudi Arabia, neither consideration has prevented the kingdom from using the substance under any conditions.

    * * *

    But it’s not just the use of US-supplied white phosphorus that is an issue, however.

    A report by Amnesty International confirmed that a US-made explosive was used in an attack on a Yemeni hospital on August 15. The medical facility – Abs Rural Hospital, run by Doctors Without Borders (MSF/Medecins Sans Frontieres) – was hit by a strike that left 11 people dead and 19 others injured. Over 4,500 patients had been treated in the hospital since MSF began supporting it. he attack was the fourth over the last 10 months on an MSF facility in Yemen, and led the organization to close its hospitals in the north of the country.


    Damage is seen inside a hospital operated by Medecins Sans Frontieres
    after it was hit by a Saudi-led coalition air strike

    Experts analyzed photos of munitions used in the bombing and concluded that a US-made precision-guided Paveway-series aerial bomb was among them. “Any attack on a medical facility in a war zone is an affront to humanity, yet this bombing is sadly just the latest in a grim series of attacks on hospitals and clinics by the Saudi Arabia-led coalition,” Philip Luther, Research and Advocacy Director for the Middle East and North Africa at Amnesty International, said in the official press release. “Deliberate attacks on hospitals and medical facilities are serious violations of the laws of war and can never be justified. Hospitals, which have special protection under international humanitarian law, should be safe places of treatment and recovery,” he added.

    It is outrageous that states have continued to supply the Saudi Arabia-led coalition with weapons, including guided and general purpose aerial bombs and combat aircraft, despite stark evidence that those arms are being used to attack hospitals and other civilian objects and in other serious violations of international humanitarian law.”

    Cited by RT, Luther called for a “comprehensive embargo on all weapons that could be used by any of the warring parties in Yemen,” and punishment for those behind the attack. Since he was referring to the US, that will not happen.

    * * *

    Finally, and most troubling, two days ago the Guardian found that one third of 8,600 Saudi-led strikes in Yemen since March 2015 have targeted civilian sites such as hospitals, schools, and mosques. It comes as the US Senate is set to vote on a draft bill that could stop a $1.15 billion weapons and military equipment delivery by the US to Saudi Arabia. The bill was approved in August, but later that month 64 Senators signed a letter to halt the sale – ensuring that the Senate would discuss it.

    Last November, the US State Department okayed the delivery of weapons worth $1.29 billion to Saudi Arabia, despite the fact that Amnesty International had repeatedly revealed they were being used in illegal and deadly attacks on civilians.

    Since coming to office seven years ago, the Obama administration has made over $115 billion worth of arms sales to the Saudis – more than any other US presidential administration, a report in the Security Assistance Monitor said.

    Over 3,700 civilians have been killed and some 2.8 million displaced by the ongoing war in Yemen, now in its second year, according to the latest estimates by the UN Office of the High Commissioner for Human Rights. Which is also why while the US airwaves are constantly bombarded with news about the Syrian conflict, hardly any major outlet will touch the just as deadly Yemen war with a ten foot pole.

  • Why Is There So Much Confusion In Macroeconomics?

    Submitted by Frank Hollenbeck via Mises.ca,

    Should we print, not print? Stimulate, not stimulate? Is austerity the right or wrong policy? Is government spending or printing effective? If we ask two economists these questions, we will likely get three opinions for each question. Economists seem confused, yet these questions are more important today than ever. Where does this confusion come from? Doesn’t economic theory give us clear-cut answers? It does, but poor terminology and a lack of focus have muddied the waters. Many macroeconomic disagreements can be elucidated with a better understanding of the role played by holding cash, or hoarding, in economics.

    To a large degree, Keynes is to blame for much of this confusion by using a double entendre. In his “General Theory, he did not clearly distinguish between savings (correctly defined) and hoarding. The paradox of thrift is a misnomer. Thrift is both savings and hoarding. It should correctly be called the “paradox of hoarding”. Economists should not be this careless with terminology.

    Even today, confusion persists. When Paul Krugman discusses thrift he is alluding to the impact of hoarding. When Austrians talk of thrift they are referring to savings. Keynesians and Austrians seem to be on different planets and some of the blame can be attributed to poor terminology.

    In a circular flow economy, the value of output must be equal to income. Income represents claims on goods and services, and can be divided into three categories. It can be consumed, saved or hoarded. Consumption is using claims on goods and services for personal satisfaction. The correct narrow definition of savings is a transfer of claims from one group to another. This is the definition found in the classical loanable funds theory of interest rates. The saver is giving up his claims to be able to consume more goods and services in the future. He makes this transfer to investors who use these claims to purchase plants and equipment to produce goods and services in the future. The last category is hoarding, or holding cash, which is the equivalent of stuffing money in your mattress. From income, it is the only claim that is not used to purchase currently produced goods and servicesKeynes, and his followers, constantly uses the word “savings” to imply two very different and distinct acts: the activity of transferring claims and the activity of holding claims. Classical economists were never this careless.

    Since these claims are unused, Keynesians fear, in a circular flow economy, the value of output would be higher than the amount of claims used to purchase that output. Since some output would remain unsold, inventories would rise, output would be curtailed, and a downward spiral in output would ensue. Any future shift in hoarding will create another spiral in output. In this scenario, prices do not fall to bring the value of output in line with the value of claims. In a Keynesian framework, prices are sticky downward.

    Let me explain this point with a very uncomplicated example. Suppose you have 10 pencils and $10. What is the price of a pencil? It can’t be $2 since we would have pencils that remain unsold, so the price would tend to fall. It can’t be 50 cents since people would have money and nothing to buy. Prices would be bid up. This would lead to equilibrium where pencils would be sold for $1 each.

    Since the government does not create pencils, the only way it can obtain pencils is by taking claims from others by borrowing, taxing or printing. If it prints $10 and used it to buy pencils, the price of pencils will increase to $2 (inflation) since we now have $20 chasing 10 pencils. The government will obtain 5 pencils by lowering the purchasing power of money. It has taxed cash balances the equivalent of 5 pencils. The same logic applies to taxes or borrowing. Every dollar printed, borrowed or taxed to finance government spending displaces an equivalent purchasing power from private consumption or investment spending. Government spending is robbing Peter to pay Paul. It rearranges the deck chairs, but does not add deck chairs.

    Most economists would agree with this “crowding out” example. Why then do some economists advocate more government spending if government spending displaces an equivalent amount of private spending? The answer lies in the role played by hoarding.

    From our initial example, suppose we hoard $5. The price of output will fall to $0.50, a period of deflation, since we now have a money supply of $5 chasing 10 pencils. If input prices also fall proportionately from $0.80 to $0.40, we are still making the same profit rate and the economy has simply adjusted input and output prices to a new level of hoarding. Hence, the level of hoarding is immaterial and the economy is operating as though we had started out with a money supply of $5 and 10 pencils.

    The Keynesian fear is twofold.

    If output prices are sticky, the price of a pencil will remain stuck at $1, or will only drop with a long lag. In this situation, with $5 chasing 10 pencils at a price of $1, we will be left with 5 unsold pencils. This excess output will lead businesses to curtail output, fire workers, until we are left with a new equilibrium of maybe only 5 pencils. The entire adjustment process has been in output and not in price.

     

    The second fear is even if output prices adjust, input prices do not adjust quickly enough. If input prices remain at $0.80 while output prices are at $0.50 we are producing at a loss, which leads to less output, more hoarding, and a downward deflation-depression spiral in the economy.

    The Keynesian prescription to avoid this depression in output is to have the government substitute its own claims for those being hoarded. The government’s claims are substituting for claims not being used. The price of pencils would remain at $1, with $5 of private demand and $5 of government demand. The government would have to print and use $5. It can neither borrow nor tax to finance this government spending since that would be mostly displacing claims that are not being hoarded.

    According to the well know Keynesian balance budget multiplier, if the government spends $1 and taxes $1, output will rise by $1. This output magic occurs because the amount taxed reduced consumption and hoarding. If, instead, the amount taxed had reduced savings, in the place of hoarding, $1 of government spending will displace $1 of consumption and (savings) investment spending: the multiplier is zero, and government spending, fiscal policy, has no direct aggregate demand influence on output. Of course, if we consider the supply side, the multiplier is negative. As Murray Rothbard eloquently said, this is a transfer of “resources from the productive [private sector] to the parasitic, counterproductive public sector.”

    Much of Keynes’s economic analysis was to disproportionately elevate the importance of hoarding. Classical economist considered the level of hoarding inconsequential, and its changes even less so.

    From this analysis we can draw the following conclusions from a Keynesian perspective. Government spending is only effective if it substitutes for claims that are being hoarded. This spending must occur while the public is increasing its desire to hoard, such as after a crash such as 2000 or 2008, and only justifiable if there is a slow adjustment of both output and input prices. Also, this substitution is only effective if it is done through monetary and not fiscal policy.

    Of course, this analysis has only looked at the direct aggregate demand effects of such printing, and has not examined the microeconomic impacts, supply side and other negative effects of printing money.

    Such printing is distortive (altering absolute and relative prices) and will cause a misallocation of resources since the new money will not be spent in the exact same areas or proportions as the money that is now being hoarded. Furthermore, even if the government could find the right areas or proportions, it would still lead to misallocations, since the hoarding reflects a desire to realign relative prices closer to what society really wants to be produced. The printing of money may actually increase the desire to hold cash, as we see today. Holding cash may be the preferred choice over consumption or investment (savings) when relative and absolute prices have been distorted by the printing press.

    Of course, no one is asking the critical questions. Why did holding more cash, or hoarding, change the money supply, and why did the public and banks decide to increase their cash holdings in the first place? Without fractional reserve banking, neither the public nor the banks could significantly change the money supply by holding more cash, nor could banks extend credit faster than slow-moving savings. The boom and ensuing malinvestments would be a thing of the past and, thus, so would the desire to hold more cash during the bust phase of the business cycle.

    If Keynesians are really concerned about this deflation-depression spiral, they should be addressing the cause — fractional reserve banking — and not the result. Telling a drunk that he can avoid the hangover by drinking more is simply making the situation worse. The real solution is to have him stop drinking.

    In addition, what happens when the economy improves and people reverse their hoarding? We will now have 10 pencils and $15. Other things being equal, prices will rise from $1 to $1.50, unless the government retires the $5 it put into the system. If they do, this will create another round of altered relative prices. The medicine is likely to be worse than the disease.

    While Keynesians may have been able to make a case for printing press money as a substitute for hoarding in 2008, it is impossible to do so today. Current government spending or printing is simply displacing claims from the private sector. Today, there is no theoretical justification for the current overzealous printing, borrowing and taxing. Economists should be united against this displacement of claims. Growth and employment are simply more likely if claims are in private hands than in public hands.

    Surprisingly, Keynesians and Austrians should be uniting to achieve the same goal, albeit for different reasons. Austrians fear the boom caused by excessive credit growth, while Keynesians (and Monetarists) fear the bust created by increases in hoarding. End fractional reserve banking and satisfy two birds with one stone.

     

  • MeRKeL UNDeR RePaiR…

    MERKEL UNDER REPAIR

  • Italy's PM Unloads On Deutsche Bank's Unfixable Problem: "Hundreds And Hundreds Of Billions Of Derivatives"

    After a tumultuous week for Deutsche Bank which saw the DOJ demand a $14 billion settlement for the bank’s past RMBS transgressions, it was another bad day for the giant German lender, whose stock and contingent converts tumbled after the investing community realized that even a modest $5.5 billion final settlement would leave it perilously undercapitalized and likely scrambling to raise more cash.

     

    As SocGen’s Andrew Lim calculated, Germany’s biggest bank would be “significantly undercapitalized” even if an eventual settlement with the DoJ can be covered by the bank’s reserves. Any settlement above €5.4 billion would imply a capital increase is needed just to pay the fine, he wrote.

    Taking prompt remedial action, news leaked over the afternoon that Deutsche Bank was hoping to bolster its balance sheet and boost its capitalization, when The Street first reported that it was trying to securitize at least some $5.5 billions of corporate loans to offload risk. The problem for Deutsche Bank, already ranked among the worst-capitalized lenders in European stress tests before the DOJ’s $14 billion demand, is that by admitting it is in balance sheet “recovery” mode it would make shareholders even more nervous: what if the bank failed to securitize those loans? Or what happens if yet another legal settlement arrives? Or, worst of all, what if Mario Draghi cuts rates again and pressures the bank’s inceome statement even more? There is little the bank can cut as is: CEO John Cryan already suspended the bank’s dividend to preserve capital and has repeatedly ruled out tapping investors for more; but if he has to, he surely will.

    But not even that is the biggest problem facing Deutsche Bank.

    Recall that several years ago, we were the first to point out the true “elephant in the room”, namely Deutsche Bank’s $75 trillion at the time in gross notional derivatives which as we said then was about 20 times bigger than Germany’s GDP, and 5 times bigger than the entire economic output of the Eurozone.” Much to the chagrin of those who did (and still do) accuse of being conspiratorial something or another, since then Deutsche Bank stocks has plunged, reaching all time lows as recently as a few months ago.

    Still, Deutsche Bank’s “derivative problem” was largely ignored by the “experts” because why bring attention to something which is fundamentally a devastating break in the narrative that “Europe is fine” and the financial crisis is contained.

    Fast forward to today when Europe is once again not fine, only this time one can’t blame Europe’s problems on Greece or Brexit, when in a surprising admission of reality, none other than Italy’s prime minister Matteo Renzi, “went there” and slammed Deutsche Bank as the true “derivative problem” facing Europe.

    To be sure, Renzi has his own problems, chief among which is how to conclude the latest and greatest bail out of Italy’s third largest and most insolvent bank, Monte Paschi, a process which we hear is not going well at all, without resorting to a government-funded rescue – a plan which the Germans have repeatedly frowned upon. 

    So it is not surprising that when faced with stiff resistance from the Germans, Renzi decided to call a spade a spade when, as Reuters reports, he said that the difficulties facing Italian banks over their bad loans are miniscule by comparison with the problems some European banks face over their derivatives.

    As Reuters reports, Renzi once again broke with the fine European tradition of ignoring the massively overlevered elephant in the roon, and said on Monday that Germany’s central bank chief Jens Weidmann should concentrate on fixing the problems of his own country’s banks, after Weidmann had urged Italy to cut its huge public debt.

    Specifically, Renzi told reporters in New York that Weidmann needed to solve the problem of German banks which had “hundreds and hundreds and hundreds of billions of euros of derivatives” on their books.

    He was, of course, referring to Deutsche Bank.

    Renzi, who has staked his career on a referendum on constitutional reform this autumn, has repeatedly criticized other European leaders in the last few days over what he sees as an inadequate European Union response to the problems of his country’s economy and Europe’s immigration crisis, which in 2016 has slammed Italy most acutely, largely bypassing Germany for the time being. In this particular case, Renzi was responding to an interview Jens Weidmann gave to daily La Stampa on Monday, in which the German said Italy needed to consolidate its budget to avoid doubts emerging about the sustainability of its public debt.

    Renzi’s angry response was predictable: stop worrying about Italy’s debt problem, after all that’s what the ECB is for, to monetize it and keep rates artificially low indefinitely. Instead worry about your own mega bank, which judging by its stock price, is something the market has been doing for quite a few months now.

    And while Renzi may be wrong about almost everything else, he is right about Deutsche Bank’s “hundreds and hundreds and hundreds of billions of euros of derivatives.”

    €42 trillion to be precise.

    Then again, it’s more than just Deutsche Bank’s problem; more than just Germany’s problem. If something bad happens to DB, it is Europe’s problem.

    So while DB may or may not find a few billion under the rug to plug its latest leaking hole, the real question is what happens when, not if, another crisis flares up and one or more counterparties to the bank’s trillions in various derivatives suddenly is unable to post margin, as its obligation becomes a pre-petition claim, sticking DB with the entire gross notional derivative amount and forcing the German giant to foot the gross, not net. Something tells us that like in 2013, nobody will acknowledge the biggest elephant in the room: after all, at this point financial liabilities are now a political issue (especially when one can blame Putin). The only difference with 2013 is that as Europe continues to splinter, more disenchanted political leaders (because the “enemy of my enemy is my friend”) will join Renzi in admitting that Europe’ emperor – Germany – and its mega bank, is not only naked but one needs scientific notation to express just how big its financial problems truly are.

  • The Gravest Threat To Your Retirement

    Submitted by Tom Dyson via InternationalMan.com,

    It’s one of the most exciting, most incredible charts in human history…

    Unfortunately, it’s also one of the scariest.

    Take a look:

    It’s a chart from the U.S. Census Bureau. It shows the centenarian population.

    A centenarian is a person aged 100 or older.

    The arrow shows how many centenarians exist in America today. The curved line after it shows the explosion of the 100-year-old population in the years to come.

    In every developed nation worldwide (such as the United Kingdom, Canada, Australia, and Japan), you’ll see the same trends.

    Lifespans are increasing at an unprecedented rate. And the 100-year-plus age bracket is the fastest-growing group of people.

    Let that sink in for a minute.

    Right now, the U.S. has an estimated 72,000 centenarians.

    If the population of centenarians continues to increase at its current rate, the U.S. will have close to 500,000 people over the age of 100 by 2055. A sixfold increase from today’s numbers.  

    Some of you reading this will live to 100. Many experts believe the first humans to live past 125 have already been born.

    Thanks to advances in medicine, diet, lifestyle, and hygiene, we’re living longer than ever before. And it’s only going to get better (or worse, depending on how you look at it).

    Living to 100 is an amazing prospect. It means more time with grandkids… more time with friends… more time to see the world… more books to read… additional hobbies to learn.

    That’s the exciting, incredible part of getting older in America.

    The scary part is paying for it all.

    Those additional years will also contain health care bills, food bills, electric bills, insurance bills, and dozens of other bills. That’s why one of your greatest concerns should be running out of money in retirement.

    Thirty years ago, the solution to money worries in retirement was relatively simple.

    There was no concern about the solvency of Social Security.

    Many corporations paid their retired employees pensions.

    Back then, you could put your saved money in safe corporate bonds that paid over 9% in interest. Even short-term government bonds paid over 6% in interest.

    These days, the solvency of Social Security and just about every government program is in question. Pensions from corporations have all but disappeared. And with interest rates near zero percent, government bonds yield less than 2%.

    Add to this the coming volatility in the stock market as The Great Unwinding unfolds.

    (The Great Unwinding is what I call the largest credit contraction in history. The world has binged on debt since the Great Depression in the 1920s and ‘30s. We’re now at the breaking point. Trillions in debt are starting to go bad and leave the system. I think the market is now in a primary downtrend. This means we’re in a bear market where assets and markets will fall steadily for a long time.)

    The risk of running out of money because of all these factors is real… and growing.

    It’s perhaps the scariest time to be a retiree.

    I don’t think many see it coming. And I don’t see many people preparing for it.

    Now, most people are counting on Social Security to bail them out. After all, with Social Security, you get steady, consistent income not tied to volatility in the stock market… for the rest of your life.

    But if you rely, or will rely, on Social Security for a big portion of your retirement income, it’s time to start paying close attention.

    With increasing life expectancy rates, I have serious concerns many retirees aren’t taking their financial futures into their own hands. And that they don’t have another plan in place. 

    If this sounds like you, don’t lose hope. A longer life is a blessing. And no matter how unprepared you may feel at the moment… there’s still time to set yourself up for a fulfilling, worry-free retirement. But you must start taking the right steps to prepare.

  • House Committee Reviewing "Oh Shit" Guy's "Troubling" Reddit Thread

    Earlier today we wrote about a Reddit thread that was allegedly created by Paul Combetta, the “Oh Shit” guy of Platte River Networks, seeking tech advice on how to “strip out a VIP’s (VERY VIP) email address from a bunch of archived emails” (see details here: “Dear FBI, This Is Intent: Hillary’s “Oh Shit” Guy Sought Reddit Advice On How To ‘Strip VIP’s Emails’“). 

    “Ironically,” the day before the Reddit thread appeared, the Benghazi Committee reached an agreement with the State Department on the production of email and other records related to their investigation.  How weird, right?

    Well, it seems as though the Reddit thread is getting some attention on Capitol Hill as well.  Earlier, Mark Meadows (R-NC), Chair of the Government Operations subcommittee of the House Oversight Committee, told The Hill that committee staff are reviewing the Reddit thread and find the “date of the Reddit post in relationship to the establishment of the Select Committee on Benghazi [to be] troubling.”

    “The Reddit post issue and its connection to Paul Combetta is currently being reviewed by OGR staff and evaluations are being made as to the authenticity of the post.”

     

    “If it is determined that the request to change email addresses was made by someone so closely aligned with the Secretary’s IT operation as Mr. Combetta, then it will certainly prompt additional inquiry.  The date of the Reddit post in relationship to the establishment of the Select Committee on Benghazi is also troubling.”

     

    Of course, as we mentioned a couple of weeks ago, the “Oh Shit” guy was granted immunity by the DOJ for cooperating with the FBI’s investigation into Hillary’s email scandal (see “The “Oh Shit” Guy That Wiped Hillary’s Server With BleachBit Was Just Granted Immunity“).

    Therefore, the only question left to answer is what recourse, if any, Congress and/or the FBI has to nullify Combetta’s immunity agreement with the DOJ if he is found to have withheld information and/or committed perjury while being questioned by federal agents?

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 19th September 2016

  • On Europe's Train Wreck Of Monetarist Absurdity

    Authored by Constantin Gurdgiev via True Economics blog,

    One chart that really says it all when it comes to the fortunes of the Euro area economy:

    And, courtesy of these monetary acrobatics, we now have private corporates issuing debt at negative yields, nominal yields… 

    The train wreck of monetarist absurdity is now so far out on the wobbly bridge of economic systems devoid of productivity growth, consumer demand growth and capex demand that even the vultures have taken into the skies in anticipation of some juicy carrion. With $16 trillion (at the end of August) in sovereign debt yielding negative and with corporates now being paid to borrow, the idea of the savings-investment link – the fundamental basis of the economy – makes about as much sense today as voodoo does in medicine. Even WSJ noted as much.

    As I recently quipped to an asset manager I used to work with:

    "A mudslide off this mountain of debt will have to happen in order to correct the excesses built up in recent years. There is too much liquidity mass built into the markets devoid of investment demand, and too weak of an economy holding it. Everywhere. By fundamental metrics of value-added growth and organic demand expansion potential, every economy is simply sick.

     

    There is no productivity growth. There is no EPS growth, even with declining S down to waves of buy-outs. There is debt growth, with no capex & no EPS growth to underwrite that debt. There is a global banking system running totally on fumes pumped into it at an ever increasing rate by the Central Banks through direct monetary policies and by indirect means (regulatory shenanigans of ever-shifting capital and assets quality revisions). There is no trade growth. There is no market growth for trade. Neither supply side, nor demand side can hold much more, and countries, like the U.S., have run out of ability to find new lines of credit to inflate their economies. Students – kids! – are now so deep in debt before they even start working, they can't afford rents, let alone homes. Housing shortages & rents inflation are out of control. GenZ and GenY cannot afford renting and paying for groceries, and everyone is pretending that the ‘shared economy’ is a form of salvation when it really is a sign that people can’t pay for that second bedroom and need roommates to cover basic bills. Amidst all of that: 1% is riding high and dragging with it 10% that are public sector ‘heroes’ while bribing the 15% that are the elderly and don't give a damn about the future as long as they can afford their prescriptions.

     

    Take kids out of the equation, and the outright net recipients of subsidies and supports, and you have 25-30% of the total population who are carrying all the burden for the rest and are being crushed under debt, taxes and jobs markets that provide shit-for-wages careers. Happy times! Buy S&P. Buy penny stocks. Buy bonds. Buy sovereign debt. Buy risk-free Treasuries… Buy, Buy, Buy we hear from the sell-side. Because if you do not 'buy' you will miss the 'ladder'… Sounds familiar, folks? Right on… just as 2007 battle cry 'Buy Anglo shares' or 2005 call to 'Buy Romanian apartments' because, you know… who wants to miss 'The Ladder'?.."

    Which brings us to the simple point of action: don't buy bonds. Don't buy stocks. Hold defensive assets in stable proportions: gold, silver, land, fishing rights… anything other than the fundamentals-free paper.

  • Silver Rocket and Gold Moribund, Report 18 September, 2016

    The prices of both metals were down again this week.

    We would guess that it has something to do with the fact that everyone knows: higher rates are coming to the dollar. The yield on the 10-year Treasury closed the previous week at 1.762% and this week at 1.701%. It may not look like much, but this is a change of +1.7%.

    Just repeat after me: “the Fed makes the economy more stable.”

    In any case, there are a few holes in the “bonds are in a bubble” bubble. One is that the worldwide trend for 35 years is falling rates. If one wishes to argue that this trend is over, one would have to acknowledge its cause and argue that this cause is no longer in effect (one would need a real theory, not just the old “inflation expectations” saw).

    More immediately, why are junk bonds and equities not dropping commensurately? If you look at a chart of junk bond yields, you see less volatility and the opposite trend. Since July 1, the Bloomberg High Yield Corporate Bond index is up 3.8%. In the same period, the Bloomberg US Treasury Bond Index is down 1.1%. When a bond price falls, that means the interest rate is higher.

    For reference, 6-month LIBOR is up from 0.92% to 1.25%, or +36% (thirty six, not a typo).

    We aren’t bond or equity traders, but we think it’s crystal clear that if rates are truly moving up, a lot, and durably, then all assets will be repriced lower. And if the US dollar is alone in bucking the falling rates trend, then look for a rising dollar index (i.e. all the other currencies will fall further, as traders will short them to get the even-greater interest rate differential).

    Needless to say, the idea of a rising dollar does not fit the bond-bubble-burst rising-rates Narrative.

    So for the moment, the prices of the metals—silver more than gold—are driven by this Narrative. How long until this Narrative bursts?

    There was an interesting news item this week, CME Group announced that it will presently launch a futures contract for the gold-silver ratio. This security will make it easier for the public to trade the gold-silver ratio. We think this is good, as it encourages arbitrage thinking. Of course, like every product in the market-casinos today, this one is designed to generate dollars (unlike our fund, which deals in physical metal, and generates gains in gold). We will have more to say about this contract as it gets closer to launch (Oct 24).

    Read on for the only true picture of the fundamentals of the monetary metals. But first, here’s the graph of the metals’ prices.

           The Prices of Gold and Silver
    prices

    Next, this is a graph of the gold price measured in silver, otherwise known as the gold to silver ratio. It did not change this week.  

    The Ratio of the Gold Price to the Silver Price
    ratio

    For each metal, we will look at a graph of the basis and cobasis overlaid with the price of the dollar in terms of the respective metal. It will make it easier to provide brief commentary. The dollar will be represented in green, the basis in blue and cobasis in red.

    Here is the gold graph.

           The Gold Basis and Cobasis and the Dollar Price
    gold

    We switched from the October to December contract this week.

    The price of gold fell this week, as did the basis.

    The Monetary Metals fundamental price of gold is down just about as much as the market price.

    Let’s look at silver.

    The
    Silver Basis and Cobasis and the Dollar Price
    silver

    The price of silver dropped just as much as gold, in proportion. The basis dropped more.

    Our fundamental price is now two bucks under the market price. Does this mean the market price has to drop immediately, now that we know this? No, right now the market is in the grips of a mini silver mania (we would not dare say bubble, at least not without trigger warnings). Like the interest rate anomalies, it would be strange to see the price of silver take off like the famed mythological silver bug rocket while the price of gold languishes, moribund.

     

    © 2016 Monetary
    Metals

  • US Desperately Pumps "Humanitarian" Smokescreen For Failing Syria Ceasefire

    Submitted by Finian Cunningham via Strategic-Culture.org,

    Washington’s lie about seeking a genuine ceasefire in Syria is in danger of being exposed for the world to see. So, hilariously, a charade is being hurriedly orchestrated in order to hide this ignominy. As usual, the Syrian government is being scapegoated for the real cause of violence in the country. That real cause is Washington’s state-sponsored terrorist-fueled war for regime change.

    After four days of continuing deadly breaches by US-backed «rebels» since the Kerry-Lavrov ceasefire deal was implemented last Monday, Washington and the dutiful Western mainstream media are preparing the inevitable excuses.

    Rather than focusing on ongoing «rebel» violence in contravention of the truce, US Secretary of State John Kerry fingered the Syrian government for preventing humanitarian access to insurgent-held eastern Aleppo as the reason for why the ceasefire is in danger of collapsing.

    Kerry accused the Syrian government of causing «unacceptable repeated delays» in delivery of humanitarian aid convoys to the northern city. Some 300,000 people are estimated to be stuck in dire conditions in the eastern side of Aleppo, which has become a key battleground in the five-year war.

    Western media reports followed suit with Reuters reporting: «Syria ceasefire deal in balance as Aleppo aid plan stalls». Another publication, USA Today, made the more pointed claim: «The regime has broken its pledges on the distribution of life-saving supplies».

    So, in Washington’s artful spin of events, it is the Syrian government of President Bashar al Assad which is reneging on the ceasefire arrangement by blocking food and medical supplies to starving civilians. This, of course, plays handily into the broader Western narrative that the Syrian «regime» is the ultimate villain of the piece. The vile Assad is mercilessly denying children food and water, goes the spin.

    Based on that premise, Washington is giving notice that it will not follow through on its ceasefire commitment to join with Russian air forces for targeting terror groups like ISIS (Daesh) and al Nusra Front. Those anticipated «joint operations» between US and Russian aircraft were supposed to be the highlight of the ceasefire plan worked out last weekend in Geneva by Kerry and his Russian counterpart Sergey Lavrov.

    But that supposed «breakthrough» is now in doubt. McClatchy News reported at the end of the week: «US to Russia – Syria military cooperation not guaranteed».

    US State Department spokesman John Kirby told reporters four days into the truce: «If, by Monday we have continued to see reduced violence and no humanitarian access, there will be no Joint Implementation Center [with Russian military]».

    Washington is mendaciously trying to pretend that there have been no breaches of the ceasefire and that the whole problem revolves around «no humanitarian access» being granted by the Syrian authorities. If the US does indeed backtrack from its stated prior commitment to cooperate with Russian forces for targeting terror groups then it is safe to assume that the entire ceasefire «deal» will be dead, even as a rhetorical concept.

    Admittedly, the level of violence in Aleppo and across the country subsided when the US-Russian ceasefire pact came into effect on September 12. Russian and allied Syrian forces halted their campaign of air strikes. Opposition violence appeared to abate too. Nevertheless, the truce was reportedly violated multiple times by anti-government militias, not just in Aleppo, but in other locations, such as Latakia, Hama and Homs.

    Furthermore, there was no apparent distinction between so-called US-backed moderate rebels and recognized terror groups in carrying out these violations. All insurgents groups were engaging in sporadic attacks – in contravention of the putative ceasefire.

    Credible Russian military reports confirmed that Syrian army units had observed the truce and had begun demilitarizing a major access road into eastern Aleppo. Syrian troops are being replaced by Russian units to safeguard the route. However, it is the militants who are refusing to withdraw from the Castello Road area, which would provide the humanitarian aid convoys access to the city.

    Indeed, insurgent factions openly declared that they would continue shelling and sniping in the Castello Road precisely in order to prevent the aid convoys arriving because they opposed the ceasefire accord even being implemented.

    Russia has correctly criticized the US as using a «verbal smokescreen» to conceal why the ceasefire is failing. The point is that Washington has negligible control over its declared moderate rebels. In fact, there is no control because in practice there is no distinction between the myriad illegally armed insurgents.

    Like the ceasefire called earlier this year in February, this latest one is breaking down because all the militants continue to breach any cessation. As Lt General Vladimir Savchenko, chief of the Russian Center for Reconciliation in Syria, points out, the US-backed opposition is using the ceasefire simply as an opportunity to rearm and regroup.

    And Washington’s policy is impotent about altering that. The CIA and Washington’s allies in Britain, France, Saudi Arabia, Qatar and Turkey armed the anti-government insurgents, including the known terror groups. The regime-change conspirators created a veritable Frankenstein monster over which they now have little control even to the point of getting it to at least appear to be complying with a ceasefire for tactical reasons. 

    The latest ceasefire is floundering like the previous attempt because Washington’s assertions about «moderate rebels» dissociating from «terror» groups is total and utter humbug.

    Risibly, as one could have predicted, John Kerry’s bombastic appeal last weekend for US-backed «rebels» to «separate» from the extremists so that American and Russian forces could then get on with the task of eliminating the terrorists has been subsequently shown to be the consummate delusion that it is.

    Washington and its allies are being caught out spectacularly in their lies over the Syrian conflict. The stone-cold truth is that they have been sponsoring terrorist proxies for the criminal purpose of regime change.

    So conspicuous and damning is Washington’s nefarious role in Syria’s conflict – which has resulted in 400,000 dead and millions turned into desperate refugees – that this crime has to be covered up at all costs. But covering it up is becoming futile because of the increasing glaring reality.

    Syria’s ceasefire is flawed because Washington, the supposed co-architect of the truce along with Moscow, is not motivated by finding a peaceful resolution to the conflict. The conflict is all about regime change and deploying terrorist agents to achieve that. That is why the ceasefire is failing – yet again.

    The unbearable truth about Washington and its criminal gang of state-sponsors of terrorism has to be concealed from public view. And that is why Washington and the dutiful Western media lie machine are cranking up the «explanation» for the ceasefire unravelling as being due to the fault of the Syrian «regime» and its Russian ally for not delivering on humanitarian commitments.

    This American smokescreen has been pumped out for nearly six years in Syria. It is really galling to hear the likes of John Kerry and Barack Obama talk about «human suffering» and the need for humanitarian ceasefires.

    The suffering and violence in Syria will stop when Washington is seen for the criminal regime that it is. That day is coming. The American smokescreen is dissipating with each passing day because of its absurd contradictions.

    And the terrorists – state sponsors and proxies alike – are finally being exposed.

  • Japandemonium: Government Blasts "Sexual Apathy" Amid Worrying Number Of Virgins

    Japan’s demographic challenges are well-known: It’s home to the world’s oldest population and has a shrinking birthrate and an astonishing number of single people. But, as The Independent reports, it seems that, despite government efforts to incentivize marriage and child-rearing, things aren’t quite trending in the right direction.

    According to the Japan Times, a new survey of Japanese people ages 18 to 34 found that 70 percent of unmarried men and 60 percent of unmarried women are not in a relationship. It gets worse: Around 42 percent of men and 44.2 percent of women admitted that they were virgins.

    As The Indepdent explains, the Japanese government under Prime Minister Shinzo Abe has said it wants to raise the nation’s fertility rate from 1.4 to 1.8 by 2025. It’s offering better child-care services and tax incentives for married couples, though such programs have yet to bear statistical fruit.

     Most people surveyed said they want to get married at some point. It’s just not clear when.

    “They want to tie the knot eventually. But they tend to put it off as they have gaps between their ideals and the reality,” Futoshi Ishii, head researcher for the study, told Japan Times. “That’s why people marry later or stay single for life, contributing to the nation’s low birthrate.”

    This is not unique to Japan — in various parts of the developed world, economic uncertainty is reshaping the way millennials and other young people conceive of their sex lives and marital choices. But it’s particularly pronounced in the Asian nation, where experts and government officials have spent the better part of a decade fretting over the country’s population decline and, as WorldViews once put it, “sexual apathy.”

  • Police Seek Motive Behind NYC Bombing, As Strange SJW Manifesto Take Credit For Explosion

    In a day in which the Islamic State claimed responsibility for a “soldier” who stabbed nine people in a Minnesota Mall, authorities were urgently trying to avoid labeling last night’s IED explosion in midtown Manhattan which injured 29 people, as the second terrorist attack in the same day. So, it not terrorism, what was it? According to the latest attempt to steer the narrative, and as we reported last night, investigators are treating the explosion as an “intentional act,” and while they haven’t ruled out terrorism, weren’t willing to label the explosion as a terrorist act until authorities had a better idea of a motive, Mayor Bill de Blasio said.

    Investigators had recovered bomb components near the explosion scene that are “indicative” of an improvised explosive device, NYC’s new Police Commissioner, James O’Neill said. Additionally, officials said they were trying to determine if the explosion in Manhattan, an unexploded device that was found four blocks away, and a blast earlier in the day about 80 miles away in New Jersey, were the work of the same individual or group, even if – as mayor de Blasio would like you to believe – there was no element of actual terrorism.

    According to the WSJ, authorities on Sunday said they see similarities between the bombs—cellphones were used in all three devices—but that they hadn’t made a clear connection. The main focus remains on the Manhattan blast. “I’m concerned,” said NYPD Commissioner James O’Neill. “We did have a bomb that was detonated…and we have no one apprehended so of course I’m concerned.” The explosion came on Mr. O’Neill’s second day on the job.

    Investigators were also working to analyze the bomb in search of any DNA material and evidence from both devices is being sent to the FBI bioterrorism lab in Virginia for further analysis.

    Luckily, nobody was seriously hurt: all of those injured were released from hospitals as of Sunday morning, authorities said. Most of the injuries were the result of flying debris and glass. One person suffered a serious injury that was described as a puncture wound, officials said.

    Meanwhile, an odd manifesto posted on Tumblr by someone claiming to have orchestrated the bombing on behalf of the LGBTQ society, was being vetted by authorities. Investigators are scrutinizing the posting but haven’t yet determined if it is authentic, according to two people familiar with the investigation.

    The manifesto consists of two Tumblr posts that went up Sunday: “I’m the NY Bomber,” the blog post claims, with the nameless writer claiming the bomb had been planted in protest of Donald Trump and broader mistreatment of the LGBT community. While New York officials have not announced a motive or suspect in the explosion, that hasn’t stopped some from circulating and crediting the page. As Pix11 first reported, the blog is titled, “I’m the NY bomber. This will be my manifesto,” and contains two entries:

    Taking a human life

     

    I don’t know exactly how I feel about taking human lives
    However, what I do know is that If I don’t do what needs to be done nobody will pay attention. LGBTQ+ people are much more likely to commit suicide than straight cisgendered people. It seems that nobody cares, however what if people from the LGBTQ+ community started lashing out in response to the violence and oppression we face with violence and possibly oppression? I’m sure that would give people a reason to not stand by while so many people are being oppressed. I suppose I’m just going to have to move forward knowing that what I am doing had a purpose and will in fact make a difference. I’ll keep you all posted.

    * * *

    Manufacturing Test Explosives

     

    Hi.

     

    You probably have all seen the news by now, the explosives detonated in New York City, that was me. Those were just some tests, I know where I have made errors and I will not make the same mistake next time.
    I did it because I cannot stand society.
    I cannot live in a world where homosexuals like myself as well as the rest of the LGBTQ+ community are looked down upon by society.
    It is 2016 and we are still being viewed as mentally ill, sinners, attention seekers, and just plain weirdos in general. I am not going to stand by while under classed and underprivileged people are oppressed. I am not going to stand by while there is inequality in my country such as the racism being seen in white police officers all over the country. I am not going to live in a country where it is OK to have a misogynist, xenophobic, racist Islamophobic, republican candidate running for President of The United States! That’s implying that republicans in general should even be taken seriously as they are all cisgendered privileged white people.
    This is not the end, this is just the beginning. I will be remembered. I will make a difference. I will eliminate my targets before it is too late.

    The blog, whose author claimed to be a member of the LGBT community and threatened to plant more explosives, was inexplicably scrubbed from Tumblr shortly after 2 p.m. Sunday.

    For now, NYPD Commissioner James O’Neill has repeated what he said since last night: “Right now we don’t have enough information to make any final conclusion… During the course of the investigation we are going to determine what the motivation is at some point. We’ll say it loud and clear and if it is an act of terrorism we’re going to come out and say it.”

    The second IED device was considered to be the best lead, federal and local officials cited by the WSJ said. Authorities moved the device to a secure NYPD facility in the Bronx around 2:30 a.m. Sunday morning. Authorities were able to successfully open the device Sunday evening so it didn’t explode in the process. Investigators found what appeared to be explosives in the device and have turned it over to the Federal Bureau of Investigation for further testing, a senior law enforcement official said.

    Whether the anonymous blogging SJW is the culprit behind the bombing, or if this is indeed the lethal act of some local terrorist cell, remains to be seen.

    We many not have to wait long for an answer: the explosion comes just as the city prepares to host the United Nations General Assembly, an annual gathering of top leaders from around the world that historically has put authorities in the city on high alert.

    “You will see a very substantial NYPD presence this week, bigger than ever,” Mr. de Blasio said. “We would normally have an expanded presence. You will see an even stronger presence now.”

    In other words, anyone who needs to travel in or through Manhattan over the next week, find alternative plans.

  • China 'Banking Stress Indicator' Spikes To Record High

    China’s credit-to-gross domestic product “gap” has reached 30.1%, the highest for the nation in data stretching back to 1995, according to the Basel-based Bank for International Settlements. As Bloomberg points out, the warning indicator for banking stress rose to a record in China in the first quarter, underscoring risks to the nation and the world from a rapid build-up of Chinese corporate debt.

    The gap is the difference between the credit-to-GDP ratio and its long-term trend. As BIS explains:

    The build-up of excessive credit features prominently in discussions about financial crises.

     

    While it is difficult to quantify “excessive credit” precisely, the credit-to-GDP gap captures this notion in a simple way.

     

    Importantly from a policy perspective, large gaps have been found to be a reliable early warning indicator (EWI) of banking crises or severe distress.

    Readings above 10 percent signal elevated risks of banking strains. A blow-out in the number can signal that credit growth is excessive and a financial bust may be looming.

    While the BIS says that credit-to-GDP gaps have exceeded 10 percent in
    the three years preceding most financial crises, China has remained
    above that threshold for most of the period since mid-2009, with no
    crisis so far.

    But, according to BIS data, in the first quarter, China’s gap exceeded the levels of 41 other nations and the euro area.

     

    This feeds into the debate earlier that China “needs a recession.”

  • ReaDY Fo KiLLeRY…

    READY

  • Michael Pento: "These Are The Most Dangerous Markets I've Ever Witnessed"

    Submittted by Adam Taggart via PeakProsperity.com,

    In this week's podcast, Michael Pento, fund manager and author of The Coming Bond Bubble Collapse, explains how the United States is fast approaching the end stage of the biggest asset bubble in history. He describes how the bursting of this bubble will cause a massive interest rate shock that will send the US consumer economy and the US government—pumped up by massive Treasury debt—into bankruptcy, an event that will send shockwaves throughout the global economy:

    These are the most dangerous markets I have ever witnessed in my entire life, and I’ve been investing for over 25 years. Let’s go over some numbers to let you know exactly how tenuous this bubble is. Its membrane has been stretched so wide and so tight that it’s about to burst, and any semblance of even maybe a little sharp object, something even a hemophiliac wouldn’t be afraid of, sends the market careening downward.

     

    Global central bank balance sheets are up from $6 trillion in 2007 to $21 trillion today and they are still being expanded at the pace of $200 billion each and every month. What’s happening is that the robotraders, the algorithms, the frontrunners on Wall Street and around the world are just gaming the system, looking for the next increase in central bank credit to take their collateral to the ECB or to the Bank of Japan or to the Fed and buy more stocks and bonds.

     

    That’s the game we’re playing. Even a hint that it might someday end sends the entire investment community scampering for the door; and that door is very, very narrow and can only fit a few people through it. So let’s go through a couple of more data points to emphasize just how big this bond bubble is and why it’s so important.

     

    So the European Central Bank is buying corporate bonds. I hope everybody knows that. So much that there's now 30% of investment-grade debt in Europe trading with a negative yield. This is not sovereign debt (as asinine as it is to ever be able as a sovereign nation to issue debt and get paid to do so). Investment grade bonds in Europe now trade with a negative yield.

     

    The Bank of Japan owns 50% of all Japanese government bonds, JGBs.

     

    About 25 percent (and this number vacillates between days where the German tenure goes north or south of the flat line) of global sovereign debt trades with a negative yield.

     

    So what happened on September 8th? Last Thursday, Mario Draghi came out and gave a press conference after leaving rates unchanged in the European Union. The audience was asking questions like: Did you discuss helicopter money? No, we really didn’t discuss it. Did you discuss extending the QE program beyond March of 2017? No, we didn’t discuss extending the 80 billion purchases of assets beyond March. There was a stirring in the audience, the reporters were beside themselves. They couldn’t believe that Mario Draghi, even though he didn’t even hint about stopping QE, he didn’t extend its duration or its quantity. That sent markets cratering. The Dow fell 400 points. The U.S. 10-year yield jumped from 1.52% to 1.68% in one day.

     

    Now, the market had a bounce back the next day, then was down again more than 200 points on the Dow. So you can tell, anybody with any objective, critical, independent mind can tell this is an unsustainable, very ephemeral rally in stocks that has occurred since 2009. And when the bond market breaks, when that bubble bursts, it will wipe out every asset — everything will collapse together — because everything is geared off of that so-called 'risk free' rate of return.

     

    If your risk free rate of return has been warped down to 0% for 96 months, then everything — and I mean diamonds, sports cars, mutual funds, municipal bonds, fixed income, REITs, collateralized loan obligations, stocks, bonds, everything, even commodities — will collapse in tandem along with the bond bubble burst.

    Click the play button below to listen to Chris' interview with Michael Pento (27m:46s).

     

  • Is This What Panic Looks Like? Reuters Polls Show Huge Shift In Electoral Map Toward Trump

    A few weeks back, Reuters/Ipsos released a fun, interactive electoral college map that allowed users to model their own expectations of how the 2016 presidential election would play out.  Reuters also offered up their own scenario based on their internal polling data from all 50 states.  And, as early as August 26, 2016 Reuters was predicting a landslide victory for Clinton.

    Reuters / Ipso

     

    But, now it’s looking increasingly likely that Reuters will have to “tweak” their polling data again as recent results show a massive Trump surge that have thrust him into the lead. 

    Reuters / Ipso

     

    Here is Reuters’ latest prediction of what the 2016 electoral college map will look like once all the votes are counted.  Notice that the entire central portion of the U.S. has turned red (including Colorado and New Mexico) along with Florida and South Carolina in the Southeast.  And perhaps even more shocking is that Reuters has been forced to move Pennsylvania out of the Democrat column and into the “Too Close To Call” column. 

    Reuters / Ipso

     

    So, here is a comparison of some of the Reuters polling data by states that have shifted since late august.

    Florida has swung 11 points toward Trump moving the state from solid Hillary to marginal Trump.

    Florida

     

    Pennsylvania has swung 5 points toward Trump moving the state from solid Hillary to “Too Close To Call.”

    PA

     

    Nevada has also swung 5 points toward Trump moving the state from marginal Hillary to marginal Trump.

    NV

     

    South Carolina has swung 8 points toward Trump moving the state from “Too Close To Call” to solid Trump.

    SC

     

    Colorado has swung 6 points toward Trump moving the state from marginal Hillary to marginal Trump.

    CO

     

    And Iowa has swung 11 points toward Trump moving the state from marginal Hillary to solid Trump. 

    Iowa

     

    New Mexico also moved from “Undecided” to Trump though Reuters didn’t have polling data as of August 26, 2016 for that state.

    And let the mainstream media panic continue…

Digest powered by RSS Digest